JP2020130516A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of adjusting presentation effect related to games under a preferable situation after power activation.SOLUTION: When power is supplied to a game machine without a clearing process that clears storage contents stored in a storage unit of main control means, adjustment of presentation effect related to games becomes possible after an elapse of a first period from the supply of the power. When power is supplied to the game machine with the clearing process, adjustment of the presentation effect becomes possible after an elapse of a second period from the supply of the power. When the adjustment of the presentation effect is performed after the performance of the clearing process, the adjustment is performed in the operation order of first operation means, second operation means, and third operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine using a game medium.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium wins a prize in a start area provided in the game area, a pachinko game in which a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed. There are machines, slot machines and the like in which a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed based on a predetermined number of bets being set and a start operation being performed.

As an example of such a game machine, a device that raises and lowers and rotates an effect movable body as a notice effect for notifying that a jackpot state will occur is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1). In Patent Document 1, an initial operation process for executing an effect of moving an effect movable body is executed after the power of the game machine is turned on.

In Patent Document 2, when a player inputs an operation to change the volume level of the effect sound by operating the operation means, the volume adjustment for changing the volume level of the effect sound is executed according to the operation input. ..

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-028170 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-137353

The volume / light amount adjustment process related to the game, which is executed in response to the adjustment operation by the player at the start timing of the initial operation process of the effect movable body, which is executed when the power of the game machine is turned on, is duplicated. Then, the control load becomes large, which may affect the initial operation of the effect movable body and the volume / light amount adjustment.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of adjusting the effect of a game under a suitable situation after the power is turned on.

The present invention has the following configuration. The reference numerals indicate an example of the correspondence with the components shown in the drawings in order to promote understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.
In the game machine (1) for playing a game, an operable effect (for example, movable effect members 17A to 17C), a main control means (main CPU 110a) for controlling the progress of the game, and the main control means (main CPU 110a). ), When supplying power to the first operating means (RAM clear switch 58c) operated when clearing the stored contents stored in the storage unit (main RAM 110c) and the game machine (1). It includes a second operating means (power switch) to be operated and a third operating means (cross key 6f) to be operated when adjusting the effect (volume / light amount) related to the game, and is accompanied by the clearing process. When the electric power is supplied to the game machine (1), the first hour (for example, the initial operation period of the accessory (or the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory)) after the power is supplied is After the lapse of time, the effect (volume / light amount) can be adjusted, and when the electric power is supplied to the game machine (1) with the clearing process, the second time (for example, for example) after the electric power is supplied. , RAM clear notification time) elapses, the effect (volume / light amount) can be adjusted, and when the effect (volume / light amount) is adjusted after the clear process is performed, the first operation The operation is performed in the order of the means (RAM clear switch 58c), the second operating means (power switch), and the third operating means (cross key 6f).

According to the present invention, it is possible to adjust the effect of the game under suitable conditions after the electric power is supplied to the game machine.

It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the lower part of a game machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the game control device. It is a block diagram of an image control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for a non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening opening mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table. It is a flowchart of the main processing by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart of the power-off processing in FIG. It is a flowchart of the recovery process in FIG. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the input control process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the 1st start port detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the preliminary determination processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the gate detection switch input process by the main control board. It is a flowchart of the special figure special electric control processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special symbol memory determination processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special symbol stop processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a jackpot game process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special game end processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the general electric control process by the main control board. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol variation processing by a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory control processing by a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal electric accessory operation mode determination table. It is a time chart which shows the energization timing of a start port opening / closing solenoid for each table. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for a jackpot. It is a flowchart of the main processing by an effect control board. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by an effect control board. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process by an effect control board. It is a continuation flowchart of FIG. 38. It is a flowchart of the variation effect pattern determination process by an effect control board. It is a flowchart of the effect input control process by an effect control board. It is a flowchart of the main processing by an image control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the menu screen displayed on an image display device. It is a flowchart of the customer waiting effect execution processing by the CPU of the image control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the customer waiting effect image including the menu screen displayed on the image control device. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume / light amount adjustment screen display displayed on an image control device. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound type of the volume change confirmation sound and the light amount change confirmation sound output from an audio output device. It is a figure which shows the structure of the voice control circuit which concerns on this embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the structure of the audio channel in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart of voice control processing by an image control board. It is a flowchart of the master volume setting process by an image control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the voice management table provided in the image control board. It is a flowchart of the error sound setting process by an image control board. It is a flowchart of the effect sound setting process by an image control board. It is a flowchart of the processing during audio output by an image control board. It is a figure explaining the adjustment operation in the customer waiting state (the 1). It is a figure explaining the adjustment operation in the customer waiting state (the 2). It is a figure explaining the adjustment operation at the time of the symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining the adjustment operation at the time of the symbol variation display which concerns on a change form. It is a flowchart of soft volume adjustment processing by an image control board. It is a flowchart of voice output processing by a voice control circuit. It is a figure which shows the transition of the output volume by changing the volume (the 1). It is a figure which shows the transition of the output volume by changing the volume (the 2). It is a flowchart of the light amount adjustment process by an effect control board. It is a flowchart of the main processing by a lamp control board. It is a flowchart of the initialization process by a lamp control board. It is a flowchart of the accessory initial operation processing by a lamp control board. It is a flowchart of the accessory effect execution determination process by a lamp control board. It is a flowchart of the accessory effect processing by a lamp control board. It is a figure which shows the initial operation pattern and the initial operation (effect operation) of a movable effect member. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the jackpot confirmation effect by the movable effect member. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the jackpot determination effect by the movable effect member. It is a figure which shows the initial operation mode of the movable effect member which concerns on the initial operation pattern, and the display mode of an image display. It is a figure which shows the initial operation mode of the movable effect member which concerns on the modified form. It is a figure which shows the operation mode of the initial operation of the effect button which concerns on the initial operation pattern at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the behavior of a game machine when a predetermined command is normally output from a main control board after power-on without RAM clear when a power-off occurs according to 1st Embodiment to a sub-control board. .. It is a timing chart explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member after the power is turned on and the timing when the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted. It is a figure which shows the behavior of a game machine when a predetermined command is not output normally from a main control board after power-on to a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the behavior of a game machine when a predetermined command is not output normally from a main control board after power-on to a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the behavior of a game machine when a predetermined command is not output normally from a main control board after power-on to a sub-control board. It is a timing chart explaining the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect member and the volume / light amount adjustment after the power is turned on according to the modified form are possible. It is a figure which shows the behavior of a game machine when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board after power-on to a sub-control board. It is a timing chart explaining the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect member and the volume / light amount adjustment after the power is turned on according to the modified form are possible. It is a figure which shows the behavior of a game machine when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board after power-on to a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the initial operation pattern and the initial operation (the effect operation) of the movable effect member after power-on with the RAM clear when the power-off occurs according to 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure about voice notification and light emission notification at the time of power-on with and without RAM clear. It is a figure which shows the behavior of the game machine when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board after power-on with the RAM clear to the sub control board. It is a timing chart explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member after turning on the power accompanied by RAM clear, and the timing when the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted. It is a timing chart explaining the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect member and the volume / light amount adjustment after the power is turned on with the RAM clear according to the modified form are possible. It is a figure which shows the behavior of the game machine when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board after power-on with the RAM clear which concerns on a modified form to a sub-control board. It is a timing chart explaining the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect member and the volume / light amount adjustment after the power is turned on with the RAM clear according to the modified form are possible. It is a figure which shows the behavior of the game machine when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board after power-on with the RAM clear which concerns on a modified form to a sub-control board. It is a timing chart explaining the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect member and the volume / light amount adjustment after the power is turned on with the RAM clear according to the modified form are possible. It is a timing chart explaining the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect member and the volume / light amount adjustment after the power is turned on with the RAM clear according to the modified form are possible. It is a timing chart explaining the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect member after the power restoration and the volume / light amount adjustment become possible when the power is cut off during the symbol variation display according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the behavior of a game machine when a predetermined command is normally output from a main control board to a sub control board after power restoration. It is a timing chart explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member after the power is restored and the timing at which the volume / light amount can be adjusted. It is a timing chart explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member and the timing when the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted after the power supply is restored according to the modified form. It is a figure which shows the behavior of the game machine when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board after the power restoration which concerns on the modified form to the sub control board. It is a timing chart explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member and the timing when the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted after the power supply is restored according to the modified form.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of game machine)
First, the configuration of the game machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the game machine 1 in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 2 is an example of a partial perspective view of the game machine 1 in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the game machine 1 in the present embodiment.
In the pachinko gaming machine as the game machine 1, the opening / closing frame 2B (inner frame) is freely attached to the outer frame 2A attached to the island structure of the game hall, and the opening / closing door 3 is openably / closably attached to the opening / closing frame 2B. ing. A window 3a is formed on the opening / closing door 3, and a transparent plate 3b is attached to the window 3a. The left end of the opening / closing door 3 is rotatably supported around the vertical axis at the left end of the opening / closing frame 2B, and a key cylinder 3c that locks the opening / closing door 3 to the opening / closing frame 2 is attached to the right end of the opening / closing door 3. Has been done. A game board 4 is attached to the opening / closing frame 2B, a game area 4a through which a game ball can flow down is formed between the game board 4 and the transparent plate 3b on the front side thereof, and the game area 4a is opened / closed by the opening / closing door 3. ..

The opening / closing door 3 is provided with an audio output device 9 (speaker) on the upper side of the window 3a, a frame lighting device 27 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a storage plate 5 for storing game balls on the lower side of the window 3a. The storage tray 5 is provided with an effect button device 6A and a selection button device 6B that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects side by side.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the opening / closing door 3 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become like. Further, the plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 27 are provided on the peripheral portion of the window 3a, and the illumination is performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each of the plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs). Performs light emission production. Further, the frame lighting device 27 includes a notification LED that is controlled to light / blink when an opening / closing door 3 is opened or a payout abnormality in which the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 100 occurs.

The effect button device 6A includes an effect button 6a capable of performing a decision operation (operation input) and a button operation effect, an effect button detection switch 6b (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the effect button 6a, and an effect. A button drive motor 6c (see FIG. 4) for changing the button 6a into a normal state and a protruding state located above the normal state, and a vibration state in which the effect button 6a vibrates in a predetermined state and a normal state. A button vibration motor 6d (see FIG. 4) for causing the effect and a button light emitting LED 6e (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6a into a quenching state and a light emitting state for emitting light in a predetermined mode are provided. By operating the effect button 6a, the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The selection button device 6B includes a cross key button 6f (hereinafter, cross key 6f) (up key button, down key button, right key button, left key button) as a selection button capable of performing operations such as selection operation. , A cross key detection switch 6g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 6f is provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1 by operating the cross key 6f. ..

A firing handle 7 is attached to the lower right side of the storage plate 5. When the launch handle 7 is rotated, the game balls introduced at the launch position are launched from the storage plate 5, and when a plurality of game balls are stored in the storage plate 5, the plurality of game balls are approximately 0. It is fired continuously at 6 second intervals. The launched game ball is guided by the guide rail 8 and introduced into the upper part of the game area 4a. The launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped by the player operating the launch stop button (not shown) provided on the launch handle 7.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, in the game area 4a, in addition to a large number of obstacle nails K, a first start port 10, a start port device 11 having an openable second start port 11a, a gate 12, and an open / close type The first big winning opening device 13 having the first big winning opening 13a, the second big winning opening device 20 having the openable second big winning opening 20a, and the plurality of general winning openings 14 each have a game ball. Balls (winning) are provided in the arrangement shown in the figure. The first starting port 10, the gate 12, and the plurality of general winning openings 14 are each a first starting opening detection switch 10a, a gate detection switch 12a, and a plurality of general winning opening detection switches 14a for detecting a game ball that has won a prize. Is attached. In the embodiment, the terms "winning ball" and "winning" include "passing".

The start port device 11 opens and closes the second start port 11a, the opening / closing member 11b for opening / closing the second starting port 11a, the second starting port detection switch 11c for detecting the game ball winning in the second starting port 11a, and the opening / closing member 11b. The second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d to be driven is provided, and the second starting port 11a is normally in a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (cannot win), and this closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Can work with.

The first large winning opening device 13 is a first large winning opening detection switch that detects a first large winning opening 13a, an opening / closing member 13b that opens and closes the first large winning opening 13a, and a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 13a. 13c has a first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d that drives the opening / closing member 13b to open / close, and the first large winning opening 13a is normally in a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win (cannot win), and this closed state. And the game ball can operate in an open state where it is easy to win a prize.

The second large winning opening device 20 is a second large winning opening detection switch that detects a game ball that has won a second large winning opening 20a, an opening / closing member 20b that opens and closes the second large winning opening 20a, and a second large winning opening 20a. 20c has a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 20d for opening / closing the opening / closing member 20b, and the second large winning opening 20a is normally in a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win (cannot win), and this closed state. And the game ball can operate in an open state where it is easy to win a prize.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the launch handle 7 to launch the game ball into the game area 4a, the game ball is launched by the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the launch handle 7. By adjusting the strength, it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "right-handed". In "left-handed", the game ball falls in the left game area 4a1 located on the left side of the center accessory 15, and in "right-handed", the game ball passes through the right-handed passage formed on the upper side of the center accessory 15. The player moves to the right game area 4a2 located on the right side of the center accessory 15 and drops the right game area 4a2.

When the game ball launched into the game area 4a wins any of a plurality of winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14, the winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 for each winning of the game ball. A set number of game balls (several to ten or more) were paid out to the storage plate 5 as prize balls, and none of the plurality of winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 was awarded. In this case, it is finally discharged to the outside of the game area 4a from the discharge port 28 formed in the most downstream part of the game area 4a.

When the game ball wins the starting ports 10 and 11a, a big hit lottery is performed, and when the game ball wins in the big hit lottery, a big hit game (special game) in which the first big winning opening 13a or the second big winning opening 20a opens occurs. When the game ball passes through the gate 12, a winning lottery is performed, and when the winning lottery is won, an auxiliary game is generated in which the second starting port 11a is opened in a predetermined mode.

A game display board 19 is provided at the lower left of the game board 4, and the game display board 19 has a first special symbol display 19a, a second special symbol display 19b, a normal symbol display 19c, and a first special symbol hold display. Instrument 19d, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 19e, normal symbol hold indicator 19f, round number indicator 19g that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game is executed, right side game during jackpot game or high probability game state A right-handed display 19h that prompts the player to launch a game ball is provided in the area 4a2.

The first special symbol display 19a is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of a special game determination (big hit determination of the first special symbol) performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10. Yes, the second special symbol display 19b is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the special game determination (big hit determination of the second special symbol) performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a. The normal symbol display 19c is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the auxiliary game determination (normal symbol collision detection) performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 12.

The special game judgment is the special figure judgment information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol, reach judgment value, special figure variation) when the game ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. (Random value for pattern determination, etc.) is acquired, and it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a special game determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10, the first special symbol display 19a performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is shown after a lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the first special symbol (notifying) is performed. Further, when a special game determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a, the second special symbol display 19b displays the variation of the second special symbol, and the determination result is shown after a lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the second special symbol (notifying) is performed.

The first special symbol display 19a and the second special symbol display 19b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators 19a and 19b blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. .. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of the special game determination.

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the big hit game in the special game determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which the first or second prize openings 13a and 20a are converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 16 times, etc.) with an interval. ), Which is an advantageous gaming state for a player who can easily win a prize ball.

The maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the first or second winning openings 13a and 20a in each round game are predetermined, but even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached, the first or second When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won in the second large winning openings 13a and 20a, one round game is completed. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated.

The auxiliary game determination is to acquire and acquire the normal figure judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol judgment, random value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 12. It is to determine whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the normal figure determination information. When the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 19c performs a variable display of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating (notifying) the determination result is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 19c is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of the auxiliary game determination.

Although the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 11a in the auxiliary game are predetermined, a predetermined number of games are played in the second starting port 11a even before the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time are reached. When the ball (for example, 10) wins, the auxiliary game ends.

The first special symbol hold indicator 19d is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (first special symbol hold) stored when a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 10. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first special figure reservations. It should be noted that the first special figure reservation is stored up to four, but may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 19e is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (second special symbol hold) stored when the game ball wins in the second start port 11a. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and is lit or blinks in a manner indicating the number of special figure reservations. It should be noted that the maximum number of the second special figure hold is stored up to four, but the number may be less than or more than four, or the second special figure hold may not be stored. Good.

The normal symbol hold indicator 19f is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of normal figure hold, which is the number of normal figure determination information (normal figure hold) stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that although the maximum number of hold of the normal figure is stored up to four, the number of hold of the normal figure may be less than or more than four, or the hold of the normal figure may not be stored.

A center accessory 15 is attached to the game board 4, and an image display device 16 composed of a liquid crystal display is provided on the central inner part side of the effect space 15A defined inside the center accessory 15. On the upper side of the 15A, a first movable production member 17A (directing character) imitating a "sword" and a second movable production member 17B (directing character) imitating the "signboard" of the title of the game machine 1 are provided. The second movable effect member 17B is arranged in front of the first movable effect member 17A. Further, on the right side of the effect space 15A, a third movable effect member 17C (directing accessory) that imitates a "sword" having a size larger than the "sword" of the first movable effect member 17A is provided.

In the center accessory 15, a frame body (decorative frame) 15a that restricts the entry of the game ball into the inside is fitted and mounted in an opening (not shown) formed in the game board 4, and the side of the frame body 15a. A warp device 15b for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 4a into the frame body 15a is provided in the portion, and a game ball introduced inside the frame body 15a by the warp device 15b is placed below the frame body 15a. A center stage 15c is formed which is rolled and flows down below the frame body 15a.

The image display device 16 performs various effect displays according to the progress (development) of the game. The effect display includes a customer waiting effect performed while the special symbol variation display is not being executed, a variation effect accompanied by the effect symbol variation display performed during the execution of the special symbol variation display, and a jackpot game being executed. There is a big hit production.

The display unit of the image display device 16 is formed with a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 16a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), a mode display area for indicating an effect mode related to the progress of the variable effect, and the like. Has been done.

The effect symbol 16a includes an identification unit consisting of code information of numbers or characters indicating "1" to "9" or "1" to "9", and a character image or decoration attached to the periphery (neighborhood) of the identification unit. It may be composed of a decorative part composed of predetermined decorative information (accompanying information) such as a frame image, or may be composed of only an identification part.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 16a, the effect symbol 16a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the special game determination (big hit determination). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777", and the loss mode is another mode.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, and switching or rotation (rotation) on the spot, etc. It may be.

Further, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 16a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the image display device 16 according to the result of the special game determination. It is designed to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed.

The display unit of the image display device 16 has a first hold icon display area 16b for displaying a number of first hold icons (for example, "○") corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1), and a second special figure. Corresponds to the second hold icon display area 16c for displaying the number of second hold icons (for example, "●") corresponding to the figure hold number (U2), and the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a) being executed. The variable icon display area 16d or the like for displaying the variable icon (for example, “⊚”) is formed.

Further, on the display unit of the image display device 16, a first reserved number display area 16e for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and a current second special symbol reserved are displayed. A second reserved number display area 16f for displaying a second reserved number indicating a number (U2) and a special symbol display area TZ for displaying a special symbol that is variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol are formed. Has been done.

The first hold icon display area 16b is partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d in the form of a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, and the first display unit. -On the fourth display unit, the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) is displayed.

The second hold icon display area 16c is partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d in the form of a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, and the first display unit. -The number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2) is displayed on the fourth display unit.

The variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display area TZ is continuously performed in a certain display mode during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display, and is movable on the front side of the display unit. The effect members 17A, 17B, and 17C are displayed at positions (for example, the end of the display unit of the image display device 16) so as to be easily visible even when the effect operation is performed. In a more preferable aspect, it is preferable that the movable effect members 17A, 17B, and 17C are displayed in a visually recognizable state without being shielded by the effect operation. Further, the display of the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 16e and 16f can be easily maintained in a visible state even if the movable effect members 17A, 17B and 17C are produced, as in the case of the special symbol. It is displayed at a position that takes into consideration (for example, the end of the display unit of the image display device 16). In a more preferable aspect, it is preferable that the movable effect members 17A, 17B, and 17C are displayed in a visually recognizable state without being shielded by the effect operation.

The panel drive device 17 includes a first movable effect member 17A, a second movable effect member 17B, a third movable effect member 17C, and the first movable effect member 17A, a second movable effect member 17B, and a third movable effect member 17B. It is provided with a stepping motor or the like for moving (moving) the member 17C.

The first movable effect member 17A is composed of a sheath portion 17a1 that imitates a sheath and a blade portion 17a2 housed in the sheath portion 17a1, and the blade portion 17a2 is driven by a stepping motor to move in the left-right direction. This is possible, and from the state where the blade portion 17a2 is housed in the sheath portion 17a1, the blade portion 17a2 moves to the left and the blade portion 17a2 can be pulled out from the sheath portion 17a1. 73 (2)).

The second movable effect member 17B can be moved in the vertical direction by being driven by a stepping motor, moves downward from the upper side of the effect space 15A, and appears on the front side of the display unit of the image display device 16. It is possible to perform the operation (see FIG. 73 (6)).

The third movable effect member 17C is composed of a sheath portion 17c1 imitating a sheath and a blade portion 17c2 housed in the sheath portion 17c1, and the blade portion 17c2 is driven by a stepping motor to move in the vertical direction. This is possible, and from the state where the blade portion 17c2 is housed in the sheath portion 17c1, the blade portion 17c2 moves up and down, and the blade portion 17c2 can be pulled out from the sheath portion 17c1. See 4)).

Further, the third movable effect member 17C is driven by a stepping motor, and the blade portion 17c2 can be tilted with the lower portion of the third movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum, and the blade portion 17c2 is removed from the sheath portion 17c1. It is possible to perform an effect operation such as tilting toward the front side of the central region of the display unit of the image display device 16 and slashing the opponent with a sword (see FIG. 73 (8)).

Further, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C are provided with a panel lighting device 18 having a plurality of LEDs, and are predetermined during standby or during execution of the effect operation. Depending on the mode, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the blade portions 17b2, 17c2, the logo, etc. emit light.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the opening / closing frame 2B and the game board 4, a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, etc. From the game ball storage unit 101 that stores the game balls supplied from the device and supplies the game balls to the payout device 100, the main control device 110A that incorporates the main control board 110 that collectively controls the progress of the game, and the main control board 110. A payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 in response to a payout control command, an effect control board 130 that controls an effect in response to an effect control command from the main control board 110, and image control. An effect control device 130A having a built-in board 140 and a lamp control board 150, a power supply device 160A having a built-in power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices 110A to 130A, and an outside of the game machine 1 (hall computer, etc.). A game information output terminal plate 90 or the like for outputting game information (game signal) is provided in the information collecting device). Further, the power supply board 160 is provided with a power plug 161 and a power switch (not shown) for supplying power to the game machine 1.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member 23 is provided so that the left and right other sides open and close in the left and right directions around the rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire effect control device 130A from the rear. In the effect control device 130A, the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, the image display device 16, and various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting). A changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount (emission intensity) of the device 27) is provided.

(Control configuration of game machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the game machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the entire game machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the effect control board 130 that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the effect control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the effect control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be transmitted in only one direction to the board 130.

The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning port detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 12a, a first starting port detection switch 10a, a second starting port detection switch 11c, a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, and a large winning port. Detection switch 13c, 20c, big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 13d, 20d, magnetic detection sensor 58a, radio wave detection sensor 58b, RAM clear switch 58c, first special symbol display 19a, second special symbol display 19b, normal symbol display 19c, 1st special symbol hold indicator 19d, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 19e, normal symbol hold indicator 19f, round number indicator 19g, right-handed indicator 19h, game information output terminal board 90, payout control board 120 , The effect control board 130 is connected.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main RAM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission / reception of various control commands are performed. Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like are performed.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.
The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

At the input / output port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 100, and a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 100. A ball presence detection switch 101a for detecting that the game balls are stored is connected to the payout motor 100b and the game ball storage unit 101.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 100 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. Do.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input / output port, and the like. A ball feed solenoid 43, a touch sensor 7a, a firing volume 7b, a firing solenoid 26a, and the like are connected to the input / output port of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 7 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 7a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 43 and the launch solenoid 26a to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 7 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 7b, the ball feed solenoid 43 is driven and the launch solenoid has a launch strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 7. The 26a is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The effect control device 130A displays an image based on the effect control board 130 that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command received from the effect control board 130. Lamp control that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (solars, motors, etc.) based on the reception of the effect control commands from the image control board 140 that controls the audio output and the effect control board 130. It includes a substrate 150.

The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

An effect button detection switch 6b and a cross key detection switch 6g are connected to the input / output port of the effect control board 130.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, the control process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the image control board 140, and the detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

(Configuration of image control board)
Here, the configuration of the image control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image control board 140.
The image control board 140 includes a control CPU 141, a control RAM 142, a control ROM 143, a CGROM 144, a crystal oscillator 145, a VRAM 146, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 200 for controlling the image display of the image display device 16.
Further, as will be described later, the VDP 200 includes a voice control circuit 300 for controlling the voice output in the game machine 1.

The general CPU 141 gives an instruction to display the image data stored in the CGROM 144 in the VDP 200 on the image display device 16 based on the variable effect pattern designation command to be described later received from the effect control board 130. Such an instruction is given by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.
Further, when the control CPU 141 receives the V blank interrupt signal or the drawing end signal from the VDP 200, the integrated CPU 141 performs interrupt processing as appropriate.
Further, the control CPU 141 also instructs the voice control circuit 300 included in the VDP 200 to output predetermined voice data to the voice output device 9 based on the variation effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 130.
The centralized RAM 142 is built in the centralized CPU 141, functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the centralized CPU 141, and temporarily stores the data read from the centralized ROM 143.

Further, the control ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, and is used to generate a control processing program of the control CPU 141, a symbol array information in which the symbol number of the effect symbol 16a and the type of the effect symbol 16a are associated with each other, and a display list. The display list generation program, the animation pattern for displaying the animation of the production pattern, the animation scene information, etc. are stored.
This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores the combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, the animation scene information stores information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. are doing.

The CGROM 144 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of an image.
Further, the CGROM 144 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression.
The CGROM 144 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.
In addition, a large amount of voice data is also stored in the CGROM 144 as described later.

The crystal oscillator 145 outputs a pulse signal to the clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200, and divides the pulse signal to synchronize with the system clock and the image display device 31 for the VDP 200 to control the clock generation circuit 205. A synchronization signal or the like is generated to achieve the above.

The VRAM 146 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data.
Further, the VRAM 146 draws or displays an image, a display list storage area 146a for temporarily storing the display list output from the control CPU 141, and an expansion storage area 146b for storing the image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206. It has a first frame buffer 146c and a second frame buffer 146d for the purpose. Palette data is also stored in the VRAM 146.
The two frame buffers 146c and 146d are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, which reads image data from one of the frame buffers (display frame buffer) based on an instruction from the control CPU 141, and based on the read image data, a video signal (RGB signal or the like). Is generated and output to the image display device 16.
However, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the VDP 200 is not only an image processor but also has an audio output function.
Further, the VDP 200 includes a control register 201, a CG bus I / F202, a CPUI / F203, a clock generation circuit 205, an extension circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, a display circuit 208, a memory controller 209, and voice control. It includes a circuit 300.

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and drawing control and display control are performed by writing and reading data to the control register 201. The control CPU 141 can write and read data to the control register 201 via the CPUI / F203.
The control register 201 includes a system control register that makes basic settings necessary for the VDP 200 to operate, a data transfer register that makes settings necessary for data transfer, and drawing that makes settings for drawing control. Six types of registers, a bus interface register that makes settings necessary for bus access, an extension register that makes settings necessary for decompressing a compressed image, and a display register that makes settings for display control. It has a register.

The CG bus I / F202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 144, and image data from the CG ROM 144 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I / F 202.
The CPUI / F203 is an interface circuit for communication with the centralized CPU 141, and the centralized CPU 141 outputs a display list to the VDP200, accesses a control register, and various types from the VDP200 via the CPUI / F203. The control CPU 141 inputs an interrupt signal.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices.
Specifically, data transfer between the control CPU 141 and VRAM 146, data transfer between CGROM 144 and VRAM 146, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of VRAM 146 are performed.
The clock generation circuit 205 inputs a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 145 and generates a system clock that determines the arithmetic processing speed of the VDP 200. Further, a synchronization signal generation clock is generated, and the synchronization signal is output to the image display device 16 via the display circuit.

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 144, and stores the decompressed image data in the expansion storage area 146b.
The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control by a display list composed of drawing control command groups.
The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating the color data of the image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the "display frame buffer" in the VRAM 146, and the generated video signal (the generated video signal). This is a circuit that outputs an RGB signal) to the image display device 16. Further, the display circuit 208 also outputs a synchronization signal (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing with the image display device 16 to the image display device 16.
In the present embodiment, the RGB signal obtained by converting the digital signal into an analog signal is output to the image display device 16 as the video signal, but the video signal may be output as the digital signal.

The memory controller 209 controls to switch between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" when the control CPU 141 instructs to switch the frame buffer.
The voice control circuit 300 reads a predetermined program based on the command transmitted from the effect control board 130, and controls the voice output in the voice output device 9.
The voice control circuit 300 outputs voice using the voice data stored in the CGROM 144. In this case, the CGROM 144 includes an audio ROM 400 for storing audio data. The voice control circuit 300 will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Note that the audio data is not stored in the CGROM 144, but the sound source ROM 400 may be separately provided in the VDP 200.
In this case, since the audio data is not stored in the CGROM 144 having a fixed capacity and more image data can be stored, the effect using the video can be made more colorful and impressive.
Further, the voice control circuit 300 is not included in the VDP 200 and may be independently provided in the image control board 140. In that case, the sound source ROM 400 may be included in the voice control circuit 300.

The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b in which a lamp control program is stored, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

A panel drive device 17, a panel lighting device 18, a frame lighting device 27, a button drive motor 6c, a button vibration motor 6d, and a button light emitting LED 6e are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp control board 150.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the panel drive device 17, the panel lighting device 18, the frame lighting device 27, the button drive motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, and the button light emitting LED 6e is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine from the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply plug 161 and uses the main power supply as the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, It is supplied to the effect control board 130, the image control board 140, the lamp control board 150, and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 has a power failure detection circuit 162 and a power supply that detect whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and output a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power failure (power failure) is provided.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine 1 is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. And supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. Note that the backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described.
In the present embodiment, the state relating to the special game determination (big hit determination) has a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state", and the state relating to the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a is a "non-time saving game". It has a "state" and a "time saving game state". Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) The "low-probability non-time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state,
(2) "Low-probability time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and time-saving game state,
(3) A "high-probability time-saving game state", which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, is provided.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state will be referred to as a "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. In addition, the game state during the jackpot game is also set to the "low probability non-time saving game state".

Here, the "low probability gaming state" is the winning probability of a jackpot in a special game determination (big hit determination) performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. Refers to a gaming state in which is set as low as about 1/300.

On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" means a gaming state in which the winning probability of the jackpot is set as high as about 1/30, which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability gaming state. The transition from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the winning probability of winning is set as low as 1/16 in the auxiliary game judgment (collision detection) performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 12, and the normal symbol It refers to a gaming state in which the average time of the variation display is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to 0.2 seconds when a hit is won.

On the other hand, in the "time saving game state", the winning probability is set as high as 15/16, the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to about 3 seconds, and the winning is won. 2 The opening time of the starting port 11a is set to 5 seconds, which means a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in which the consumption of the gaming ball is suppressed as compared with the non-time saving gaming state. The transition from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

In the present embodiment, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the lottery per normal figure are more advantageous in the "time-saving game state" than in the "non-time-saving game state". However, only one of the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery may be set to be advantageous.

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 11.

(Big hit judgment table)
6 (1) and 6 (2) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot determination table referred to when determining whether or not the stop result of special symbol variation is a jackpot, and FIG. It is a jackpot determination table for one special symbol, and FIG. 6 (2) is a jackpot determination table for a second special symbol.
This is a jackpot determination table referred to in a special game determination (big hit determination) performed based on a winning of a game ball to the first or second starting ports 10, 11a. In the jackpot determination table, the probability state when the jackpot determination is performed, the random value for jackpot determination, and the result of the jackpot determination are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table, and determines whether it is a “big hit” or a “loss” based on the current probability state and the acquired jackpot determination random number value.

As the probability game state of the jackpot winning probability determined as "big hit", there are a "low probability gaming state" in which the jackpot winning probability is relatively low and a "high probability gaming state" in which the jackpot winning probability is relatively high. In both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the range in which the jackpot determination random numbers can be taken is set to 300, for example, "0" to "299".

In the low probability game state, if the jackpot winning probability is set to, for example, 1/300, and the jackpot random number value obtained from the 300 jackpot random numbers is "3", which matches the jackpot specific value, the jackpot is considered as a jackpot. It is judged. On the other hand, in the high probability game state, the jackpot winning probability is set to, for example, 10/300, and the jackpot random number value obtained from the 300 jackpot random numbers matches the jackpot specific value "3", "7". , "36", ... "250", it is judged as a big hit. As described above, in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot winning probability is relatively higher than in the low-probability gaming state, so that the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

(Design determination table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol.
FIG. 7 (1) is a jackpot symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol at the time of a jackpot, and FIG. 7 (2) is a loss symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol at the time of loss. Further, in more detail, each symbol determination table is configured for each special symbol display device, and is composed of a symbol determination table for the first special symbol display device and a symbol determination table for the second special symbol display device.

As shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (2), in the special symbol determination table, the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the determination result of the special symbol determination are displayed. The stop symbol data indicating the determination result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated with each other.

The special symbols "01" and "04" are the jackpot special symbols that execute the first jackpot game in which the 16 round games are executed, and the special symbols "02" and "05" are the 16 rounds. It is a jackpot special symbol that executes the second jackpot game in which the game is executed, and the special symbol "03" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the third jackpot game in which the two round games are executed. .. Further, the special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed.

In the present embodiment, one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of lost special symbols. May be associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (2), and based on the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol and the random value for determining the special symbol, the special symbol The type, the stop symbol data, and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 8 is a variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 9 is a reference when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the time-saving gaming state. It is a variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state to be performed.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, in each fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which variation display is performed, the result of jackpot determination, and the determination result of the special symbol (Stop symbol data), reach judgment random number value, first special figure hold number (U1) or second special figure hold number (U2), fluctuation pattern judgment random value, and special figure change as a judgment result. The pattern, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the variation pattern specification command indicating the special symbol variation pattern are associated with each other.

It can be said that the "variation pattern" can at least specify the type of the special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, and the variation time of the special symbol. Also, if the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the reach judgment random value is referred to, but in the case of a big hit, reach occurs except in special cases, so it is configured not to refer to the reach judgment random value. ing.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, when the number of special figure reservations (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) increases, a special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined.

The main CPU 110a refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8 or 9, and refers to the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination (stop symbol data), the random value for reach determination, and the number of reserved first special symbols (U1). Alternatively, the special figure fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are determined based on the second special figure hold number (U2) and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern designation command is produced. It is designed to be transmitted to the control board 130.

Further, as will be described later, in the effect control board 130, the content (effect mode) of the variation effect is determined based on the variation pattern of the variation pattern designation command. Therefore, each of the effects shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is shown. In the rightmost column of the fluctuation pattern determination table, the production contents that can be executed by the fluctuation production are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8 or 9, the three effect symbols of "normal variation", "shortening variation", "long variation", and "ultra-shortening variation" are separated or synchronized. It means that it fluctuates at high speed and stops without reaching, the normal fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the long fluctuation, and the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation. It ends, and the ultra-shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the shortened fluctuation.

In addition, "reach" is a variation that causes a player to expect a jackpot game to be executed such that a part of a combination of effect symbols that notify a jackpot is temporarily stopped and other effect symbols fluctuate. Means an aspect. For example, when "777" is set as a combination display mode indicating a jackpot determination result, the same effect symbol is temporarily stopped at "7" in the left side region and the right side region, and the remaining effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the center region. Refers to a mode in which is fluctuating.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol sways slightly or the effect symbol is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol is stopped (not completely stopped). Aspect.

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach in which the same effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol fluctuates in the center area, which is the reach with the lowest expectation of a jackpot. ing. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not make a big hit, but the "normal reach" may make a big hit.

In addition, "SP reach" is performed after the normal reach, and is a super reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach. For example, of the three effect symbols, the two temporarily stopped production symbols on the left and right are reduced and moved to the corner of the display unit of the image display device 16, and a jackpot game is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device 16. Is designed to perform a special effect that makes the player expect the player to be executed.

In addition, "SPSP reach" is performed after normal reach or after super reach, and is a special reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than super reach. For example, of the three effect symbols, the two left and right effect symbols that have been temporarily stopped are reduced and moved to the corners of the display unit of the image display device 16, and "SP" is used by using almost the entire display unit of the image display device 16. It has come to perform a special production with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit than "Reach".

In addition, "full rotation reach" is a reach that is a big hit. For example, all three production symbols are aligned at the same speed and fluctuate at a low speed, and almost the entire display unit of the image display device 16 is used to perform a special production rather than "SPSP reach".

As a feature of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the variation time is relatively shorter when the variation pattern is determined in the time-saving gaming state than when the variation pattern is determined in the non-time-saving gaming state. The point is that it is easy to determine (the average fluctuation time becomes shorter). Therefore, it is possible to change the fluctuation time of the special symbol between the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Large winning opening opening mode determination table)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening mode determination table for changing the state of the first big winning opening 13a or the second big winning opening 20a in the big hit game.
In the big winning opening opening mode determination table, the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the type of the big winning opening to be opened, the maximum number of round games in the big hit game, the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening in one round game, and the big hit The opening time from the start of the game to the execution of the first round game, the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening in each round game, the opening time of the big winning opening for one opening of each round game, The closing interval time for closing the big winning opening after the end of the round game is associated with the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the big hit game.

When the stop symbol data is "01", the main CPU 110a executes a big one jackpot game, and when the stop symbol data is "02", the second jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game. When the game is executed and the stop symbol data is "03", the third big hit game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second big hit game, is executed.

(Game status setting data table)
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for setting a game state after the jackpot game is completed. In the game state setting data table, the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the winning state data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time-saving game flag indicating the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state can be executed. The number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of times of variable display, the high-probability game flag indicating that the game is in a high-probability game state, and the number of high-probability games (X) indicating the number of variable displays that can be performed in the high-probability game state. Is associated with.

Here, the "winning state data" is information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a non-short-time gaming state, a short-time gaming state, a low-probability gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 11, and based on the stop symbol data and the winning state data, the time-saving game flag, the time-saving game count (J), the high-probability game flag, and the high The number of stochastic games (X) is determined.

When the high probability game state is set, the high probability game number (X) may be set to 50,000 times, but in the high probability game state, the jackpot winning probability is 10/300. Since the next jackpot winning is substantially confirmed, the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game are jackpot games in which the next jackpot game is confirmed.

As a feature of the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 11, even if the same stop symbol data is used, the time saving game flag is set and the time saving game count (J) is set based on the winning state data (game state at the time of winning the jackpot). May be different.

Specifically, in the case of the stop symbol data 01 (special symbol 01), "00H" indicating a low probability non-time-saving game state is stored as the winning state data with respect to the time-saving game flag and the number of time-saving games (J). If so, the time saving game flag is not set at the end of the jackpot game, and the time saving game count (J) is set to 0 times. On the other hand, if "01H" indicating a low probability time saving game state and "02H" indicating a high probability time saving game state are stored as winning state data, the time saving game flag is set at the end of the jackpot game. , Set the number of time-saving games (J) to 100 times. As a result, the number of time-saving games (J) can be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit, and the player can be interested in the game state at the time of winning the big hit.

Next, the progress of the game in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart.
(Main processing of main control board)
FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110.
This main process is started when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, and is continuously executed while the main control board 110 is activated.

After the power is turned on, the main CPU 110a waits for 2000 ms after the security check in step S1 and permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S2. Then, the main CPU 110a determines in step S3 whether or not the RAM clear switch 58c is “ON”.

When the main CPU 110a determines that the RAM clear switch 58c is "ON" (step S3; Yes), the main CPU 110a clears the RAM in step S4. Here, the RAM clear is to set various information (for example, information indicating the gaming state) stored in the main RAM 110c as the initial state. After clearing the RAM, the main CPU 110a sets the work area at the time of clearing in step S5, and transmits the RAM clear designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S6.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines in step S7 whether or not the RAM clear switch 58c is "ON" again. When the RAM clear switch 58c is “ON” again (step S7; Yes), the main CPU 110a performs initial setting of the peripheral portion in step S8. Here, the peripheral portion includes an effect control board 130, an image control board 140, a lamp control board 150, and the like. Then, the initial setting of the peripheral portion is performed by transmitting an "initial setting instruction command (power-on command)" instructing the control unit of each control board to execute the initial setting (initial setting instruction command transmission). processing). In the initial setting instruction command transmission process executed in the initial setting of the peripheral portion in step S8, the detection result by the dish full detection switch 32a (the full state command based on the full detection signal indicating whether or not the dish is full) is used. Includes transmission processing to the effect control board 130.
It also includes a process of transmitting a customer waiting command to the effect control board 130 after transmitting an initial setting instruction command (power-on command).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 110a determines that the RAM clear switch 58c is not "ON" (step S3; No), the main CPU 110a determines in step S9 whether or not the backup flag is "ON". When it is determined that the backup flag is "ON" (step S9; Yes), the main CPU 110a compares the checksum of the main RAM 110c at power-on and the checksum of the main RAM 110c at power-off created in step S10. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal.

When the main CPU 110a determines that the checksum is normal (step S10; Yes), the main CPU 110a executes a recovery process described later in step S11. If it is determined that the backup flag is not "ON" (step S9; No), or if it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S10; No), the process proceeds to step S4 described above.

When the process of step S8 or step S11 is executed, the main CPU 110a sets the cycle (for example, 4 ms) of the built-in CTC (timer counter) in step S12. The main CPU 110a executes the timer interrupt processing described later using the cycle set here.
When the CTC cycle is set in step S12, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on command to the payout control board 120 in step S13, and executes a power-off monitoring process for monitoring the power-off in step S14.

Subsequently, the main CPU 110a updates the variation pattern random number in step S15, and sets to prohibit the interrupt of the timer interrupt process in step S16. Subsequently, the main CPU 110a updates the initial value random number (step S17), and sets to allow the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (step S18). Then, the main CPU 110a returns the process to step S14. That is, the main CPU 110a repeatedly executes the processes of steps S14 to S18.

(Power cutoff monitoring process)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the power cutoff monitoring process in step S14 in FIG.
Following the process of step S13 or step S18, the main CPU 110a prohibits the interrupt process in step S21, and the power supply to the game machine 1 is cut off based on whether or not a power cutoff signal is input from the power supply board 160. It is determined whether or not (step S22). When it is determined that the power supply is not cut off (step S22; No), the main CPU 110a permits the interrupt process (step S23).

When the main CPU 110a determines that the power supply is cut off (step S22; Yes), the main CPU 110a clears the output port for inputting / outputting various information to the main CPU 110a (step S24), and the main RAM 110c at the time of the power cutoff A checksum is created from the contents and stored in the main RAM 110c (step S25). In this process, the power supply voltage becomes "0" after detecting that the power supply voltage starts to decrease due to the power failure of the power supply supplied to the main control board 110 (after determining "Yes" in step S22). It will be done until it becomes.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the backup flag to "ON" (step S26) and prohibits access to the main RAM 110c (step S27). Then, when the process of step S23 is performed or the process of step S27 is performed, the process proceeds to step S12.

(Recovery process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating the restoration process in FIG.
When the main CPU 110a determines that the checksum is normal (step S10; Yes), the main CPU 110a sets the work area of the main RAM 110c at the time of restoration in step S31. Next, in step S32, the main CPU 110a refers to the information of the main RAM 110c and determines whether or not the jackpot was hit when the power was turned off. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress when the power is turned off (step S32; Yes), in step S33, a jackpot status command for notifying the effect control board 130 to that effect is transmitted.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed when the power is turned off (step S32; No), the main CPU 110a determines in step S34 whether or not the special symbol is being changed when the power is turned off (step S34). When it is determined that the special symbol is not changing when the power is turned off (step S34; No), the main CPU 110a notifies the effect control board 130 that it is in the customer waiting state (non-gaming) in step S35. Send a customer waiting status command for.

When it is determined that the special symbol is changing when the power is turned off (step S34; Yes), the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the remaining fluctuation time of the change display of the special symbol after the power is restored in step S36. The remaining fluctuation time is calculated by subtracting the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the time when the power is turned off from the predetermined fluctuation time based on the fact that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed at the predetermined fluctuation time. Will be done.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the probabilistic change is in progress (probability change game state) when the power is turned off (step S37). If it is determined that the probability change is in progress when the power is turned off (step S37; Yes), the main CPU 110a transmits a probability change state command for notifying the effect control board 130 in step S38.

When it is determined that the probabilistic change is not in progress (step S37; No), the main CPU 110a determines in step S39 whether or not the time is shortened (time-saving game state) when the power is turned off. When it is determined that the time reduction is in progress when the power is turned off (step S39; Yes), the main CPU 110a transmits a time reduction state command for notifying the effect control board 130 in step S40.

When it is determined that the main CPU 110a is not in the time saving when the power is turned off (step S39; No), it can be determined that the main CPU 110a is in the normal gaming state when the power is turned off. Send a normal state command to notify you.
In this way, the main CPU 110a uses the customer waiting state command, the jackpot state command, and the probability change state command that indicate the state when the power is turned off as power recovery commands for notifying that the power supply (power) supply to the game machine 1 has been restored. , The time saving state command, and the normal state command are transmitted to the effect control board 130. The probabilistic state command, the time saving state command, and the normal state command each include information on the remaining fluctuation time of the variation display of the special symbol after the power is restored if the special symbol is changing when the power is turned off. That is, the power recovery command includes a power recovery command indicating that the player was not playing (waiting for customers) when the power was turned off, and a game being played when the power was turned off (big hit game state, probabilistic game state, time saving game state, normal game). There is a power recovery command that indicates that the status was).

After executing any of the processes of step S33, step S38, step S40, and step S41, the main CPU 110a sets the peripheral portions (effect control board 130, payout control board 120) in step S42, and in step S43. Set the backup flag to "OFF". The peripheral portion setting process in step S42 includes a process of transmitting the detection result by the saucer full detection switch 32a to the effect control board 130. The full state command may be included in the above power recovery command.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the main control board 110.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 ms), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

First, in step S101, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area. Next, in step S102, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, updates the normal symbol time counter, and the normal electric opening time counter. Performs time control processing for updating various timer counters such as update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of subtracting "1" from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal power opening time counter.

In step S103, the main CPU 110a includes a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for normal symbol determination, and a random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs random number update processing of numerical values. Specifically, 1 is added to each random number counter to update the random number counter. If the result of addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to 0, and if the random number counter makes one round, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value random number at that time.

In step S104, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process for updating the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S105, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 110a includes a first start port detection switch 10a, a second start port detection switch 11c, a gate detection switch 12a, a first special winning opening detection switch 13c, a second big winning opening detection switch 20c, and a general winning opening detection. An input control process for determining whether or not each switch of the switch 14a has an input is performed. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S106, the main CPU 110a uses the special figure determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach) acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a. Judgment (random value for judgment, random value for judgment of fluctuation pattern), fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening / closing of the first or second winning openings 13a, 20a, setting of the game state, etc. Special figure Tokuden control processing is performed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S107, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 12, displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, opens and closes the second starting port 11a (auxiliary game), and the like. Performs the subsidy control process.

In step S108, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 110a refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120. Do. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S109, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process. In this process, the main CPU 110a detects the occurrence of a magnetic error or a radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 58a and the radio wave detection sensor 58b, and if detected, a magnetic abnormality error detection command or a radio wave abnormality error detection. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the door open state based on the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a, and if detected, transmits a door open error detection command to the effect control board 130.
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the jamming of the game balls in the passage for paying out the game balls from the storage portion of the game balls based on the detection signal from the saucer full detection switch 32a, and if detected, the dish full error detection command. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when it is detected that the error state is canceled by the state of the input signal and the detection signal, the main CPU 110a transmits an error release command to the effect control board 130. Further, the effect control board 130 transmits a signal for notifying the error detection and error cancellation to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 again.
The main CPU 110a does not transmit an error release signal depending on the type of error generated in the game machine 1. That is, an error release signal is transmitted when the dish is full, the door is open, and the ball is clogged, but an error release signal is not transmitted when an illegal radio wave is detected.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a has external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, start port opening / closing data output to the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d, first. 2 Large winning opening opening / closing data output to the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 20d, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 19a, second special symbol display 19b, and normal symbol display output to the normal symbol display 19c. Data creation process for creating data such as data, special symbol hold display data output to the first special symbol hold indicator 19d, second special symbol hold indicator 19e, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol display 19f. I do.

In step S111, the main CPU 110a includes port output processing for outputting signals such as external output data, start opening opening / closing data, and winning opening opening / closing data created in step S110, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. Display output processing that outputs signals such as special symbol hold display data and normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission process that sends commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. The output control process for executing the effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S112, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Input control processing)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an input control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S121, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 14a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 14. When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a adds predetermined data to the general winning opening counter used for the winning ball and updates it.

In step S122, the main CPU 110a has input a detection signal from the first large winning opening detection switch 13c or the second large winning opening detection switch 20c, that is, the game ball has entered the first large winning opening 13a or the second large winning opening. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered the mouth 20a. When the detection signal is input from the first large winning opening detection switch 13c, the main CPU 110a adds predetermined data to the large winning opening winning ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it, and also updates the first large winning opening detection switch 13c. Add the counters of the first large winning opening ball entry counter (C1) and the second large winning opening entry ball counter (C2) storage area for counting the game balls that have won in the opening 13a and the second large winning opening 20a. Update.

In step S123, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 10.

In step S124, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 11b.
When the main CPU 110a inputs the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c, the main CPU 110a performs the same process as in step S123.
However, in this second start port detection switch input process, "1" is added to the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and the extracted jackpot determination random value, special symbol determination random value, and reach determination are performed. The random value for use is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the first start port detection switch input process and the second start port detection switch input process differ only in the storage area for storing various data, and all other processes are the same.
In step S125, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 12.

(1st start port detection switch input process)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a first start port detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S131, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is input (step S131; Yes), the process shifts to step S132, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is not input (step S131; Yes). S131; No), the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S132, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the start port prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

Next, in step S133, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than 4. When the number of holds set in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (step S133; Yes), the process is transferred to step S134 and the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area is stored. If the number of reserved items set is not less than 4 (step S133; No), the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S134, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.
In step S135, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. The random value for jackpot judgment is stored.
In step S136, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a special symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and sets the vacant storage unit into the vacant storage unit. The acquired random number value for the special symbol is stored.

In step S137, the main CPU 110a acquires the game random value (reach determination random value and fluctuation pattern determination random value), and is a storage unit that is vacant in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area. Is searched, and the acquired random number values for games (random value for reach determination and random value for fluctuation pattern determination) are stored in a vacant storage unit.
In step S138, the main CPU 110a performs pre-determination processing on each random number value acquired in steps S135 to S137 based on the pre-determination table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state.

(Preliminary judgment processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a pre-determination process by the main control board.
First, in step S151, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value newly written in the special symbol hold storage area based on the pre-determination table (not shown).

Next, in step S152, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination as a result of the jackpot determination in step S151 has been tentatively determined as a jackpot. If it is tentatively determined to be a big hit (step S152; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S153, and if it is not tentatively determined to be a big hit (step S152; No), it shifts the process to step S155.
When the jackpot is tentatively determined in step S152, the main CPU 110a tentatively determines the type of special symbol (stop symbol data) by determining the newly written random number value for the special symbol in step S153.

Next, in step S154, the main CPU 110a generates a start prize designation command corresponding to the type of the provisionally determined special symbol, sets it in the transmission data storage area for effect, and ends the pre-determination process. The start prize designation command is provided so as to be identifiable in the same manner as the variation pattern designation command shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, and the jackpot and loss information are associated with each other.

If it is not tentatively determined as a big hit in step S152, in step S155, the main CPU 110a sets a start winning designation command indicating a loss in the production transmission data storage area, and ends the pre-determination process.

Also in the second start port detection switch input process shown in step S124, the main CPU 110a generates prize information with reference to the pre-determination table, and transmits a start prize designation command based on the prize information to the effect control board 130. Performs pre-judgment processing.

By the above pre-determination process, when the game ball enters the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a, the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as a start winning designation command.
Therefore, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the start prize designation command analyzes the start prize designation command and triggers the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a this time. A predetermined effect can be executed in advance even before the change of the special symbol is started.
However, this pre-determination process is determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters each of the starting ports 10, 11a. Therefore, if the game state is changed before the first hold or the second hold reserved by the entry is processed, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may be different from the result of the advance determination process. There is.

(Gate detection switch input processing)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a gate detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input.

When it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input (step S171; Yes), the main CPU 110a determines in step S172 whether or not the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4.
If the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a is not input (step S171; No), the main CPU 110a ends the gate detection switch input process.
In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed, and the upper limit of the number of reserved rights for the variation display of the normal symbol is set to "4".

If it is determined in step S172 that the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 (step S172; Yes), the main CPU 110a is stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area in step S173. The value obtained by adding "1" to the normal symbol hold number (G) is stored as a new normal symbol hold number (G).
If it is determined in step S172 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is not less than 4 (step S172; No), the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

Next, in step S174, the main CPU 110a extracts one hit determination random number value from the random number range (for example, 0 to 19) prepared in advance, and stores the extracted random number value in the normal symbol hold storage area. ..
Next, in step S175, the main CPU 110a extracts one symbol determination random number value from the random number range (for example, 0 to 10) prepared in advance, and stores the extracted random number value in the normal symbol hold storage area. Ends the gate detection switch input process.

(Special figure special electric control processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure special electric control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S181, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data, and refers to the branch address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S182.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 in step S183 (step S183; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the special symbol storage determination process (step S184).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 0 in step S183 (step S183; No), the main CPU 110a determines in step S185 whether the special figure special electric processing data = 1.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S185 (step S185; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol variation processing (step S186).

When the special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S185 (step S185; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 2 in step S187.
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 in step S187 (step S187; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the special symbol stop processing (step S188).
If the special figure special electric processing data = 2 in step S187 (step S187; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189 (step S189; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the jackpot game processing (step S190).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189 (step S189; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 4 in step S191.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4 in step S191 (step S191; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing (step S192).
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is not set in step S191 (step S191; No), the main CPU 110a ends the special figure special electric control process.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol storage determination process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S201, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Here, if the variation of the special symbol is being displayed, that is, if the special symbol time counter ≠ 0 (step S201; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process ends.
Further, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, that is, if the special symbol time count = 0 (step S201; No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S202 and stores the second special symbol hold number (U2). It is determined whether the area is "1" or more.

When it is determined that the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is not "1" or more (step S202; No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S204, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2). If it is determined that the storage area is "1" or more, the process is moved to step S203. As a result, the second special symbol storage area is processed with priority over the first special symbol storage area.

In step S203, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area and stores it.
In step S204, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is “1” or more. When it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (step S204; No), the process is transferred to step S215, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is ". If it is determined that the value is 1 ”or higher (step S204; Yes), the process proceeds to step S205.
In step S205, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.

In step S206, the main CPU 110a uses a predetermined random number value (a random number value for jackpot determination, special) stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold number (U) storage area subtracted in steps S202 to S205. Shift processing is performed between the symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, the fluctuation pattern determination random value (special symbol determination information)) and the start winning designation command. Specifically, a predetermined random value stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area and the start prize designation command are stored in the previous storage unit. Shift to.

Here, the predetermined random number value and the start winning designation command stored in the first storage unit are shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the predetermined random number value and the start winning designation command stored in the first storage unit are written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) and already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit). The stored data will be deleted from the special symbol hold storage area. Further, after the shift, the MODE of the start prize designation command is processed so as to correspond to the storage area after the shift.

In step S207, the main CPU 110a is based on the data (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value) written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S206. Execute the jackpot judgment process.

In step S208, the main CPU 110a performs the fluctuation pattern determination process.
The variation pattern determination process first determines the variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state by referring to the game state storage area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, the variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 7 is determined in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the variation for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Determine the pattern determination table. After that, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern determination table with reference to the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the variation pattern determination random value.

In step S209, the main CPU 110a sets the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the production transmission data storage area.
In step S210, the game state at the start of the fluctuation is confirmed, and the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is set in the transmission data storage area for production.
In step S211 the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 19a and 19b. That is, the variable display data of the special symbol is set in the processing area. As a result, when the information written in the processing area is related to the first special symbol hold, the first special symbol display 19a is blinked, and when the information is related to the second special symbol hold, the second special symbol display 19b is blinked. Will blink.

First, in step S212, when the main CPU 110a starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above, the special symbol time counter is provided with the fluctuation time (counter value) based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S208. Set to the counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S213, the main CPU 110a sets 00H to the customer waiting determination flag. That is, the customer waiting determination flag is cleared. The customer waiting determination flag = "00H" indicates that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner or a big hit game is being played. On the other hand, when neither the variable display of the special symbol nor the jackpot game is in progress (non-game state), the customer waiting determination flag = "01H" is stored. When the customer waiting determination flag = "01H" is stored, the customer waiting command is set in step S217 described later, and it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 that the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or the jackpot game is not in progress.

In step S214, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 and ends the special symbol storage determination process.
In step S204, when it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "0", that is, both the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) are reserved. If not, the main CPU 110a determines in step S215 whether or not 01H is set in the customer waiting determination flag.

When 01H is set in the customer waiting determination flag (step S215; Yes), the special symbol memory determination process is completed, and when 01H is not set in the customer waiting determination flag (step S215; No). , The process is transferred to step S216.
In step S216, the main CPU 110a sets 01H to the customer waiting determination flag so that the customer waiting designation command is not set many times in step S217 described later.
In step S217, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting designation command in the production transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

(Big hit judgment process)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot determination process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S221, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is turned on in the high-probability game flag storage area. The case where the high-probability game flag is turned on is the case where the current game state is the high-probability game state. If the high-probability game flag is turned on, the process is transferred to step S222, and if the high-probability game flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S223.

In step S221, when the high-probability gaming flag is turned on, that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (step S221; Yes), the main CPU 110a has a high probability corresponding to the high-probability gaming state. Select the hourly random number judgment table.
In step S221, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is not turned on, that is, the current game state is not the high probability game state (low probability game state) (step S221; No), the main CPU 110a is in the low probability game state. Select the low-probability random number judgment table corresponding to.

In step S224, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination random number value written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S206 at the time of high probability selected in step S222 or S223. Judgment is made based on the random number judgment table or the low probability random number judgment table. More specifically, when the special symbol reservation storage area shifted in step S206 is the first special symbol storage area, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol in FIG. 6 (1) is referred to. When the special symbol reservation storage area shifted in step S206 is the second special symbol storage area, the jackpot determination random value is referred to with reference to the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 6 (2). Based on, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

In step S225, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is determined to be a jackpot from the result of the jackpot determination in step S224.
If it is determined to be a big hit (step S225; Yes), the process is transferred to step S226, and if it is not determined to be a big hit (step S225; No), the process is transferred to step S229.

In step S226, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol determination random value for the jackpot written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S206, and determines the type of special symbol (stop). The symbol data) is determined, and the jackpot symbol determination process is performed in which the determined stop symbol data is set in the stop symbol data storage area.

Specifically, when the special symbol reservation storage area shifted in step S206 is the first special symbol storage area, the jackpot special symbol determination table of FIG. 7 (1) is referred to, and in step S206. When the shifted special symbol holding storage area is the second special symbol storage area, the special symbol storage area is stopped based on the special symbol determination random value with reference to the jackpot special symbol determination table of FIG. 7 (1). The stop symbol data indicating the type of the symbol is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is set in the stop symbol data storage area. The determined special symbol is used to determine the operation mode of the big winning opening in the big hit game processing described later, and is also used to determine the game state after the big hit game is completed.

In step S227, in order to transmit the data corresponding to the special symbol to the effect control board 130, the main CPU 110a generates an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol for the jackpot and sets it in the effect transmission data storage area. ..
In step S228, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined from the information set in the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is set in the game state buffer. To do. Specifically, if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are not set, 00H is set, and if the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, 01H is set. If the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

In this way, apart from the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), it is decided to set the game state at the time of jackpot winning in the game state buffer during the jackpot game. Since the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag in the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) are reset, based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot after the jackpot game ends. This is because the game state storage area cannot be referred to when newly determining the game state at the end of the jackpot game. In this way, by providing the game status buffer, by referring to the game status information in the game status buffer after the jackpot game ends, the game status after the jackpot game ends (time saving) is newly based on the game status at the time of winning the jackpot. You can set the game status, the number of time reductions, etc.).

If it is not determined to be a big hit in step S225 (step S225; No), the process is transferred to step S229.
In step S229, the main CPU 110a determines a special symbol for loss with reference to the special symbol for loss determination table of FIG. 7 (2), and sets the determined stop symbol data for loss in the stop symbol data storage area. ..
In step S230, in order to transmit the data corresponding to the special symbol to the effect control board 130, the main CPU 110a generates an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol for loss and sets it in the effect transmission data storage area. , End the jackpot determination process.

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation process by the main control board 110.
In step S241, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S212 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S241; No), the special symbol fluctuation processing is terminated.

When it is determined that the fluctuation time set in step S241 has elapsed (step S241; Yes), in step S242, the main CPU 110a performs the routine processing (big hit determination processing) before the special symbol fluctuation processing. The special symbols set in steps S227 and S230 are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 19a and 19b. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the jackpot determination.

In step S243, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S244, when the main CPU 110a starts the stop display of the special symbol as described above, the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 250 counter) is set in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted by "1" every 2 ms in step S110.
In step S245, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 and ends the special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop process by the main control board 110.
In step S251, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S244 has elapsed (is the special symbol time counter ≠ 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the symbol stop time has elapsed (step S251; Yes), the process is transferred to step S252, and when it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S251; No). ), End the special symbol stop processing.

In step S252, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area. The time-saving game flag The case where the flag is turned on in the storage area is the case where the current game state is the time-saving game state.
When the flag is turned on in the time-saving game flag storage area (step S252; Yes), the process is transferred to step S253, and when the flag is turned off in the time-saving game flag storage area (step S252; No). , The process is transferred to step S254.

In step S253, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game end determination process. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from (J) stored in the time-saving game count (J) storage area and stored as a new remaining time-saving game count (J), and the stored time-saving game count (J) It is determined whether or not J) is "0", and if the number of time-saving games (J) = 0, the flag stored in the time-saving game flag storage area is cleared (off). On the other hand, if the number of time-saving games (J) is not 0, the flag stored in the time-saving game flag storage area remains on, and the process proceeds to step S254.

In step S254, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the high probability game flag storage area. The case where the flag is turned on in the high-probability game flag storage area is the case where the current game state is the high-probability game state.
When the flag is turned on in the high-probability game flag storage area (step S254; Yes), the process is transferred to step S255, and when the flag is turned off in the high-probability game flag storage area (step S254; Yes). No), the process is transferred to step S256.

In step S255, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game end determination process. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from (X) stored in the high-probability game count (X) storage area and stored as a new high-probability game count (X), and the stored high-probability game If the number of times (X) = 0, the flag stored in the high-probability game flag storage area is cleared (off). On the other hand, if the number of high-probability games (X) is not 0, the process proceeds to step S256.

In step S256, the main CPU 110a confirms the current game state and sets the game state designation command in the production transmission data storage area.
In step S257, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot symbol (stop symbol data = 01 to 05). If it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (step S257; No), in step S258, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special symbol special electric processing data and ends the special symbol stop processing.

If it is determined in step S257 that it is a jackpot symbol (step S257; Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data in step S259.
Next, in step S260, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. Specifically, the data in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game number (X) storage area, the time-saving game flag storage area, and the time-saving game number (J) storage area are cleared.

In step S261, the main CPU 110a determines whether it is a "first jackpot", a "second jackpot", or a "third jackpot" according to the stop symbol data, and an opening command corresponding to these types. Is set in the transmission data storage area for production.
In step S262, the main CPU 110a determines whether it is a "first jackpot", a "second jackpot", or a "third jackpot" according to the stop symbol data, and the opening time according to these types. Is set in the jackpot game timer counter. The jackpot game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102. When this process is completed, the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol stop process.

(Big hit game processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot game process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S271, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. For example, if "0" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area, it means that the opening is currently in progress. Therefore, the round game count (R) storage area is referred to to determine whether the opening is currently in progress.
When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening is currently in progress (step S271; Yes), the process shifts to step S272, and when it is determined that the main CPU 110a is not currently opening (step S271; No), the process proceeds to step S276. To move.

In step S272, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game timer counter set in step S265 has become "0", and if the jackpot game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed (step S272; No), the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed (step S272; Yes), the process proceeds to step S273.

In step S273, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start setting process.
In the jackpot start setting process, first, the opening mode determination table according to the type of jackpot is determined according to the stop symbol data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, according to the stop symbol data, the first jackpot game jackpot opening mode determination table, the second jackpot game jackpot opening mode determination table, and the third jackpot game Determine and set one of the large winning opening opening mode determination tables. Next, "1" is added to the current number of round games (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area and stored. In this step S273, nothing is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. That is, since the round game has not been performed even once, "1" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area.

In step S274, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. In this large winning opening opening / closing process, energization start data of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d and the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 20d are set, and the large winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S273 is referred to. Then, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the opening times of the first big winning opening 13a and the second big winning opening 20a are set in the big hit game timer counter.

In step S275, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of times of opening (K) = 1, and if K = 1, transmits information on the number of round games (R) to the effect control board 130. Therefore, the large winning opening opening (R) round designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for production according to the number of round games (R). For example, at the start of the first round game of the jackpot game, the number of round games (R) is set to "1" and K = 1, so the command for specifying the first round of opening the big winning opening is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. On the other hand, when K = 1, the jackpot opening (R) round designation command is not set in the production transmission data storage area, and the jackpot game process is terminated. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of the round, the large winning opening opening (R) round designation command is transmitted only at the start of the round.

In step S276, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. The ending referred to here is a process after all the preset round games are completed. Therefore, if it is determined that the ending is currently in progress (step S276; Yes), the process is transferred to step S289, and if it is determined that the ending is not currently in progress (step S276; No), the process is transferred to step S277. ..

In step S277, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special winning opening 13a and the second large winning opening 20a are closed. If it is determined that the 1st prize opening 13a and the 2nd prize 20a are closed (step S277; Yes), the process is moved to step S278, and the process is transferred to the 1st prize 13a and the 2nd prize 20a. If it is determined that the item is not closed (step S277; No), the process proceeds to step S279.

In step S278, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time set in step S280, which will be described later, has elapsed. The closing time is also determined by whether or not the jackpot game timer counter = 0, as in the opening time. As a result, if the closing time has not passed (step S278; No), the jackpot game process is ended, and if the closing time has passed (step S278; Yes), the process is moved to step S274. ..

In step S279, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the first special winning opening 13a and the second large winning opening 20a is satisfied.
This "opening end condition" is that the values of the first big winning opening counter (C1) and the second big winning opening counter (C2) have reached the maximum number (for example, nine), or the maximum opening time. The fact that it has passed (the jackpot game timer counter = 0) corresponds to this. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied (step S279; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S280, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied (step S279; Yes). Step S279; No), the jackpot game process is completed.

In step S280, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process.
In the large winning opening closing process, the main CPU 110a stops energization of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d and the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 20d in order to close the first large winning opening 13a and the second large winning opening 20a. The first large winning opening 13a, based on the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K), with reference to the large winning opening opening mode determination table determined in step S273 while setting the data. The closing time of the second big winning opening 20a is set in the big hit game timer counter. As a result, the first large winning opening 13a and the second large winning opening 20a will be closed.

In step S281, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round has been completed. Specifically, in one round, the number of times of opening (K) is the maximum number of times of opening, or the values of the first large winning opening counter (C1) and the second large winning opening counter (C2) are the maximum number ( For example, since the process ends on the condition that the number of the counters reaches 9), it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied.

When it is determined that one round is completed (step S281; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S282, and when it is determined that one round is not completed (step S281; Yes). No), the jackpot game process is completed.
In step S282, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the open number (K) storage area and 0 in the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area. That is, the number of open times (K) storage area and the number of winning balls (C) storage area are cleared.

In step S283, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area is the maximum. When the number of round games (R) is the maximum (step S283; Yes), the process is transferred to step S286, and when the number of round games (R) is not the maximum (step S283; No), the process proceeds to step S284. Move the process.
In step S284, the main CPU 110a sets a land end designation command in the effect transmission data storage area according to the number of round games (R) in order to transmit the end information of the round game to the effect control board 130.

Next, in step S285, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the current number of round games (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area and stores it.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S283 that the number of round games (R) is the maximum, in step S286, the main CPU 110a stores the number of round games (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area. Reset.

In step S287, the main CPU 110a determines which of the "first jackpot", "second jackpot", and "third jackpot" is the jackpot according to the stop symbol data, and ends according to the type of jackpot. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area to be transmitted to the effect control board 130.
In step S288, the main CPU 110a determines which of the "first jackpot", "second jackpot", and "third jackpot" is the jackpot according to the stop symbol data, and ends according to the type of jackpot. Set the time to the jackpot game timer counter.

In step S289, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. As a result, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (step S289; Yes), 4 is set in the special figure special electric processing data in step S290 to end the jackpot game, and it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed. If so (step 289; No), the jackpot game process is terminated.

(Special game end processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a special game end process by the main control board 110.
In step S321, the main CPU 110a loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area and the game information in the game state buffer.
In step S322, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 11, and based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer, the high-probability game flag at the end of the jackpot game. Processes whether or not to set the high-probability game flag in the storage area. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", the high-probability game flag is set (turned on) in the high-probability game flag storage area.

In step S323, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 11, and stores the high-probability game number (X) based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. Have the area set a predetermined number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50,000 times are set in the high probability game count (X) storage area.

In step S324, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 11, and based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer, the time-saving game is stored in the time-saving game flag storage area. Process whether to set the flag. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", a flag is set (turned on) in the time saving game flag storage area.

In step S325, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 11, and based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer, the time-saving game number (J) storage area. To set a predetermined number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50,000 times are set in the time saving game number (J) storage area.

In step S326, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state and sets the game state designation command in the production transmission data storage area.
In step S327, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data and ends the special game end processing.

(Fuzu Fuden control processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a normal drawing control process by the main control board 110.
In step S331, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general-purpose electric processing data, and in step S332, calculates the branch address from the loaded general-purpose electric processing data.
In step S333, if the normal symbol processing data = 0 (step S333; Yes), the main CPU 110a performs the normal symbol variation processing in step S334 and ends the normal symbol control processing. If the normal power processing data is not 0 (step S333; No), it is determined that the normal power processing data = 1, the normal electric accessory control processing is performed in step S335, and the normal power control processing is completed. To do.

(Normal symbol variation processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol variation process by the main control board 110.
In step S341, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. If the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress (step S341; Yes), the process is transferred to step S358, and if the variation display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S341; No), the process is transferred to step S342.

In step S342, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop display time of the normal symbol set in step S361 described later has elapsed. As a result, when it is determined that the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S342; Yes), the process is transferred to step S343, and when it is determined that the stop time of the normal symbol has not elapsed (step S342; Yes). Step S342; No), the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S343, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol hold number (G) stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is 1 or more. As a result, when the number of normal symbol reservations (G) stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is 1 or more (step S343; Yes), the process is transferred to step S344, and the normal symbol hold number (G) If G) is not 1 or more (step S343; No), the normal symbol variation process is terminated.
In step S344, the main CPU 110a stores a new normal symbol hold number (G) obtained by subtracting "1" from the value (G) stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area.

Next, in step S345, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. At this time, the data stored in the previous storage unit is written in the predetermined processing area and is erased from the normal symbol reservation storage area.
Next, in step S346, the main CPU 110a determines the hit determination random value stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. When a plurality of hit determination random values are stored, the hit determination random values are read out in the order in which they are stored.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the hit determination table is referred to, and the hit determination random value shifted to the processing area is compared with the above table to determine whether or not the hit is achieved. For example, in the non-time-saving game state, one of the hit-determination random numbers of "0" to "19" is determined to be a hit, and in the time-saving game state, "0". Of the hit determination random numbers of ~ "19", 19 hit determination random numbers of "0" to "18" are determined to be hit, and the other random numbers are determined to be lost.
As a result, if it is determined to be a hit (step S347; Yes), the process is transferred to step S348, and if it is determined not to be a hit (loss) (step S347; No), the process is transferred to step S352. ..

In step S348, the main CPU 110a performs a symbol determination process. Here, with reference to the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 30, the symbol determination random value shifted to the processing area is determined, and either the long-term open symbol or the short-term open symbol is determined. Specifically, when the symbol determination random value shifted to the processing area is "0" or "1", it is determined as a long-term open symbol, and when it is "2" to "10", it is determined as a short-term open symbol. judge.

Then, when the result of the symbol determination process in step S348 is determined to be a long open symbol (step S349; Yes), the long open symbol is set (step S350), and when it is determined to be a short open symbol. (Step S349; No), the short open symbol is set (step S351).
If it is determined in step S347 that there is no hit (loss), the main CPU 110a sets the loss symbol (step S352).

Next, in step S353, the main CPU 110a sets the normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command in the transmission data storage area for production. In the normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the determined normal symbol is long open symbol and short open symbol. It indicates whether it is a symbol or a lost symbol, and when the command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the effect control board 130 executes the effect related to the lottery of the normal symbol (variation effect of the normal symbol). To.

Next, in step S354, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area.
The time-saving game flag is turned on when the game state is in the time-saving game state, and the above flag is not turned on when the game state is in the non-time-saving game state.
If it is determined that the time saving game flag is on (step S354; Yes), the process is transferred to step S355, and if it is determined that the time saving game flag is not turned on (step S354; No), the step The process is transferred to S356.

When it is determined that the flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a sets a counter corresponding to 1 second in the normal symbol time counter (step S355), and the flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area. If it is determined that it is not turned on, a counter corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the normal symbol time counter (step S356). By the process of step S355 or step S356, the time for displaying the variation of the normal symbol is determined. The normal symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102.

Next, in step S357, the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 19c. The variable display of the normal symbol is to give the player the impression that the lottery is currently in progress by blinking the LEDs at predetermined intervals on the normal symbol display 19c. The variable display of the normal symbol is continuously performed for the time set in step S355 or S356. When this process is completed, the normal symbol variation process is completed.

If it is determined in step S341 that the variation of the normal symbol is being displayed (step S341; Yes), in step S358, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set variation time has elapsed. That is, the normal symbol time counter is subtracted by "1" every 4 ms, and it is determined whether the set normal symbol time counter is 0. As a result, when it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed, it is necessary to continue the fluctuation display as it is. Therefore, the normal symbol variation processing is ended and the next subroutine is executed.

When it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (step S358; Yes), the main CPU 110a stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 19c in step S359. At this time, the normal symbol (long open symbol, short open symbol, or lost symbol) set by the routine processing prior to that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 19c. As a result, the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is notified to the player.

Next, in step S360, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol confirmation command in the effect transmission data storage area in order to transmit to the effect control board 130 that the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped and the symbol is confirmed. It should be noted that the normal symbol confirmation command can identify which symbol the stopped displayed symbol is.
Next, in step S361, the main CPU 110a sets a time for the normal symbol display 19c to stop and display the normal symbol. Here, the stop time of the normal symbol is set to 1 second, and a counter corresponding to 1 second is set in the normal symbol time counter so that the player can recognize the confirmed symbol.

Next, in step S362, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set normal symbol is a hit symbol (long open symbol or short open symbol). As a result, when the set normal symbol is a hit symbol (step S362; Yes), the normal electric accessory processing data = 1 is set in step S363, and the process is transferred to the normal electric accessory control process. If the set normal symbol is a lost symbol (step S362; No), the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

(Ordinary electric accessory control processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a normal electric accessory control process by the main control board 110.
It should be noted that this ordinary electric accessory control process is executed when it is determined as "hit" in step S362 of the ordinary symbol variation process shown in FIG. 28.

In step S371, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol stop time set in step S361 has elapsed. As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed (step S371; Yes), the process is transferred to step S372, and when it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S371; No). ), End the normal electric accessory control process.

In step S372, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is already in open control. As a result, when it is determined that the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d is in the opening control (step S372; Yes), the process is transferred to step S382, and it is determined that the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 11d is not in the opening control. If so (step S372; No), the process is transferred to step S373.

When it is determined in step S372 that the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d is not in the open control, the main CPU 110a determines whether the time saving game flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state. .. As a result, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (step S373; Yes), the process is transferred to step S378, and when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state (step S373; Yes). S373; No), the process is transferred to step S374.

When the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state, in step S374, the main CPU 110a determines whether the symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 19c, that is, the symbol set in step S361 is the long open symbol. judge. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol displayed as stopped is a long-open symbol (step S374; Yes), the counter corresponding to 4.2 seconds is set in the normal electric open time counter in step S375.
If it is determined in step S374 that the symbol displayed as stopped is not a long-open symbol (step S374; No), a counter corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the normal electric opening time counter in step S377.

After the process of step S375, in step S376, the main CPU 110a sets a long release start command in the effect transmission data storage area in order to transmit to the effect control board 130 that the opening of the second start port 11a is started. .. In the present embodiment, only when the non-time saving gaming state and the long opening symbol are determined, the type of the normal symbol and the gaming state are identified at the start of energization of the second start port opening solenoid 11d. It may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 if possible.

Even when it is determined in step S373 that the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, in step S378, the main CPU 110a has a symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 19c as in step S374. Determine if it is a long open symbol. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol displayed as stopped is a long-open symbol (step S378; Yes), the counter corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the normal power opening time counter in step S379. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol displayed as stopped is not a long-open symbol (step S378; No), a counter corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the normal power opening time counter in step S380.

In step S381, the main CPU 110a sets a table for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d. Specifically, when the process of step S375 is performed, it is shown in FIG. 33 (a) with reference to the normal electric accessory operating mode determination table for the non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 32 (1). When the long open TBL1 is set and the process of step S377 is performed, FIG. 33 (c) refers to the normal electric accessory operating mode determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 32 (1). Set the short opening TBL1 shown in. Further, when the process of step S379 is performed, the long-open TBL2 shown in FIG. 33 (b) is displayed with reference to the normal electric accessory operating mode determination table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 32 (2). When the setting is performed and the process of step S380 is performed, the short-open TBL2 shown in FIG. 33 (d) is referred to with reference to the normal electric accessory operating mode determination table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 32 (2). To set. Then, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is energized based on the set table.

In step S382, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set normal power release time has elapsed. That is, the normal power release time counter is subtracted every 4 ms, and it is determined whether or not the set normal power release time counter = 0. As a result, when it is determined that the normal power opening time counter = 0 (step S382; Yes), the process is transferred to step S383, and when it is determined that the normal power opening time counter = 0 is not (step S382; Yes). Step S382; No), the normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

When the normal power release time set in step S382 has elapsed, in step S383, the main CPU 110a sets the start port solenoid energization stop data and stops the energization of the second start port solenoid energization solenoid 11d.
In step S384, the main CPU 110a sets the normal electric accessory processing data = 0 and ends the normal electric accessory control process.

Next, various tables stored in the sub ROM 130b will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
34 and 35 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table for determining the variation mode of the effect symbol 16a in the image display device 16. In the variation effect pattern determination table, the current game state, the variation pattern specification command received from the main control board 110, the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and the determined variation effect pattern are associated with each other. FIG. 34 is a loss variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a loss, and FIG. 35 is a jackpot variation effect pattern determination that is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It's a table.

The variable effect pattern is an image display device 16, an effect button device 6A, a selection button device 6B, an audio output device 9, a panel drive device 17, a panel lighting device 18, and a frame lighting device during variable display of a special symbol. It is an effect mode of a variable effect performed by using various effect devices such as 27, and an effect configuration (effect mode) such as the content of a reach effect is described.

For example, when the variation effect pattern determination table for loss in FIG. 34 is used to determine the variation effect pattern, the current game state is "non-time saving game state" and the variation pattern designation command is "E6H, 05H". The variable effect pattern 08 is determined at a rate of 40%, the variable effect pattern 09 is determined at a rate of 30%, the variable effect pattern 10 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variable effect pattern 10 is determined at a rate of 10%. 11 is determined.

Here, the "normal variation" indicates that the normal variation effect of the reachless loss in which the reach state does not occur due to the effect symbol is performed.
The "long fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation production of loss without reach, which is longer than the normal fluctuation production and does not cause a reach state, is performed.
The "shortening variation" indicates that the shortening variation effect of the loss without reach, which is shorter than the normal variation effect and does not cause the reach state, is performed.
The "ultra-shortening variation" indicates that the ultra-shortening variation effect of loss without reach, which is shorter than the shortened variation effect and does not generate a reach state, is performed.

“Normal reach” means that the same effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area of the display unit of the image display device 16, and a reach state occurs in which the remaining one effect symbol fluctuates in the center area. It shows that the normal reach effect is executed without the specific effect that is expected.
"SP reach" is an SP reach effect in which a specific effect that is expected to execute a jackpot game is executed while reducing the effect symbol and moving the reduced effect symbol toward the end of the display unit. It is shown that. As a specific effect, for example, a fan effect is performed to determine whether or not a ally character is a big hit.
"SPSP reach" means that the effect symbol that is changing in the variable display area of the display unit of the image display device 16 is reduced, the reduced effect symbol is moved closer to the end of the display unit, and the jackpot game is executed. It indicates that the SPSP reach effect in which the expected specific effect is executed is executed. As a specific effect, a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle with each other and a mission production in which a commanded mission is performed are performed.
"Full rotation reach" means that scrolling is performed at a low speed with the production symbols of the same display mode aligned in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit of the image display device 16, and a jackpot game is executed. It shows that the full rotation reach effect that performs a special effect indicating that is executed.

The jackpot expectation of each reach effect is set to increase in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full rotation reach effect (big hit confirmed). When the SPSP reach effect is finally executed, it is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher when the SP reach effect is passed than when the SP reach effect is not passed.

Next, the process executed by the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 will be described.

(Main processing of production control board)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the effect control board 130.
In step S510, the sub CPU 130a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b and initializes and sets the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c in response to the power being turned on.
At this time, the sub CPU 130a includes an image display device 16, an audio output device 9, an effect button device 6A (button drive motor 6c, a button vibration motor 6d, a button light emitting LED 6e), and a panel drive device 17 (first to third movable effects). Members 17A to 17C, stepping motors), panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27, and the like are controlled. Then, after receiving the initialization OK signal for the initialization instruction signal from both the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, the process proceeds to step S520.

In step S520, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect random number update process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c. After that, the process of step S520 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control board)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the effect control board 130.
Although not shown, a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 130 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (2 ms), reads a timer interrupt processing program, and interrupts the timer on the effect control board 130. The process is executed.

In step S601, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.
In step S602, the sub CPU 130a updates various timer counters used in the effect control board 130.
In step S603, the sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When the effect control board 130 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 110, the command reception interrupt process of the effect control board 130 occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer. After that, the analysis process of the command received in step S603 is performed.

In step S604, the sub CPU 130a checks the detection signal of the effect button detection switch 6b, and performs the effect input control process related to the effect button 6a.
In step S605, the sub CPU 130a transmits various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the liquid crystal control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.
In step S606, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis processing)
38 and 39 are flowcharts illustrating the command analysis process by the effect control board 130.
As shown in FIG. 38, first, in step S610, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not there is a command in the receive buffer, and confirms whether or not the command has been received.
If there is no command in the receive buffer (step S610; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the command analysis process, and if there is a command in the receive buffer (step S610; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S611.

Next, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error detection command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is an error detection command (step S611; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S612, and the command stored in the receive buffer must be an error detection command. If it is determined (step S611; No), the process is transferred to step S613.
In step S612, the sub CPU 130a transmits an error detection signal to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Next, in step S613, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error release command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is an error release command (step S613; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S614, and the command stored in the receive buffer must be an error release command. If it is determined (step S613; No), the process is transferred to step S615.
In step S614, the sub CPU 130a transmits an error release signal to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Next, in step S615, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a RAM clear designation command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the RAM clear designation command (step S615; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S616, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the RAM clear designation command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S615; No), the process proceeds to step S617.

In step S616, the sub CPU 130a performs a RAM clear process. In this process, until the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on again, the information of the RAM clear notification effect for notifying that the RAM clear is being prepared waiting for the initialization (clearing) of the information stored in the main RAM 110c is provided. , The RAM clear notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

In step S617, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power-on command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a power-on command (step S617; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S618, and the command stored in the receive buffer must be a power-on command. If it is determined (step S617; No), the process is transferred to step S619.

In step S618, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process. In this process, the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on again, the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared), and the information of the power-on effect for notifying that the power is turned on is transmitted to the image control board 140. The power-on notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit to the lamp control board 150.

In step S619, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a power recovery command (either a customer waiting state command, a jackpot state command, a probability change state command, a time saving state command, or a normal state command). Is determined.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a power recovery command (step S619; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S620, and the command stored in the receive buffer must be a power recovery command. If it is determined (step S619; No), the process is transferred to S621.

In step S620, the sub CPU 130a performs a power restoration process. In this process, the power recovery command received from the main control board 110 is analyzed, and information on the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol after power restoration when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being performed when the power is turned off, the power supply Information on the game state (customer waiting state, jackpot game state, probability change game state, time-saving game state, or normal game state) at the time of disconnection, and the power was turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 58c. The power restoration notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the power restoration effect for notifying the above to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

In step S621, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting command (step S621; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S622, and the command stored in the receive buffer must be a customer waiting command. If it is determined (step S621; No), the process is transferred to step S631.

In step S622, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect pattern determination process for determining the customer waiting effect pattern. In this process, a customer waiting effect pattern is determined, the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and information on the determined customer waiting effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. , The data based on the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S631, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a start winning designation command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the start prize designation command (step S631; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S632, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the start prize designation command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S631; No), the process proceeds to step S641.

In step S632, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the received start winning designation command and executes the data update process corresponding to the starting winning designation command. The start prize designation command is associated with information related to jackpots and losses that are tentatively determined by the preliminary determination process. Therefore, here, the information about the newly reserved first hold (U1) or second hold (U2) is stored in the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S633, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the start winning designation command and performs a hold display mode determination process of transmitting the hold display command to the image control board 140 in order to perform the hold display in a predetermined mode. As a result, the first image display device 16 displays the current number of holds of the first hold (U1) and the second hold (U2).

In step S641, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a variation pattern designation command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern specification command (step S641; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S642, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the variation pattern specification command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S641; No), the process proceeds to step S651.

In step S642, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining one variation effect pattern from the plurality of variation effect patterns based on the received variation pattern designation command. This variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.
In step S643, the sub CPU 130a shifts the hold display data stored in the first hold storage area and the second hold storage area and the data corresponding to the start winning designation command, and shifts the hold display data after the shift. A hold display mode update process for transmitting information to the image control board 140 is performed.

In step S651, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command. The effect symbol designation command is set in steps S227 and S230 of the main control board 110.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the effect symbol designation command (step S651; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S652, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the effect symbol designation command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S651; No), the process proceeds to step S661.

In step S652, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect symbol determination process for determining the effect symbol 16a to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 16 based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command. In this process, the effect symbol designation command is analyzed to determine the effect symbol data constituting the combination of the effect symbols 16a according to the presence or absence of the jackpot and the type of the jackpot, and the determined effect symbol data is stored in the effect symbol storage area. set.

In step S661, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a symbol determination command. The symbol determination command is set in step S243 of the main control board 110.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command (step S661; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S662, and the command stored in the reception buffer must be a symbol confirmation command. If it is determined (step S661; No), the process is transferred to step S671.

In step S662, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol stop processing. In this process, in order to stop and display the effect symbol, the data based on the effect symbol data determined in step S652 and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 16a are set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S671, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the command for specifying the fluctuation pattern of the normal figure (step S671; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S672, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the normal figure. If it is determined that the command is not a variation pattern specification command (step S671; No), the process is transferred to step S681.
In step S672, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal map variation effect pattern determination process for determining one normal map variation effect pattern from a plurality of normal map variation effect patterns based on the received normal map variation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 39, in step S681, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a long release start command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the long release start command (step S681; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S682, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the long release start command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S681; No), the process proceeds to step S691.
In step S682, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect processing during the long opening. Here, a notification effect is executed to notify that the second start port 11a is opened for a long time (4.2 seconds) in the non-time saving game state.

In step S691, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command (step S691; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S692, and the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S691; No), the process proceeds to step S700.

In step S692, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal symbol fluctuation stop process. In this process, in order to stop and display the normal symbol effect symbol, the effect symbol data corresponding to the received normal symbol confirmation command and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol effect symbol are set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. To do.

In step S700, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the game state specification command (step S700; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S701, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the game state specification command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S700; No), the process proceeds to step S711.
In step S701, the sub CPU 130a sets the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area in the sub RAM 130c.

In step S711, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening command. The opening command is set in step S262 of the main control board 110.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening command (step S711; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S712 and determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is not the opening command. In the case (step S711; No), the process is transferred to step S721.

In step S712, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot start effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot start effect pattern. In this process, the jackpot start effect pattern is determined based on the opening command, the determined jackpot start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined jackpot start effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 140 and the lamp control. The corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c for transmission to the board 150.

In step S721, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a command for designating the opening of the winning opening.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the command for designating the opening of the winning opening (step S721; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S722, and the command stored in the receiving buffer wins the prize. If it is determined that the command is not a mouth open designation command (step S721; No), the process is transferred to step S731.

In step S722, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect pattern determination process during the round to determine the jackpot effect pattern. In this process, the effect pattern during the round is determined for each round to be started, based on the large winning opening opening designation command having information on how many round games are started. Then, the determined effect pattern during the round is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. ..

In step S731, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round end designation command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the round end designation command (step S731; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S732, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the round end designation command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S731; No), the process proceeds to step S741.
In step 732, the sub CPU 130a performs a pause (interval) effect pattern determination process for determining an effect pattern between each round.

In step S741, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending command.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the ending command (step S741; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S742 and determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is not the ending command. In the case (step S741; No), the command analysis process is terminated.

In step S742, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In this process, the jackpot end effect pattern is determined based on the ending command, the determined jackpot end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined jackpot end effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board. In order to transmit to 150, the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

(Variable effect pattern determination process)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 130.
The sub CPU 130a executes the variation effect pattern determination process when the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer of the effect control board 130. In this variation effect pattern determination process, various effect devices (effect button device 6A, audio output device 9, panel drive device 17, panel lighting device 18) including the image display device 16 are performed during the variation display of the special symbol. , The variable effect pattern indicating how to control the frame lighting device 27) is determined.

In step S801, the sub CPU 130a acquires the effect random value updated in step S520.
Next, in step S802, the sub CPU 130a sets the variation effect pattern determination table with reference to the current game state and effect mode.
The effect mode notifies the currently set game state. Specifically, in the non-time saving game state, a normal mode for notifying that the current gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state is set, and in the probabilistic gaming state, the current gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state. A probabilistic mode for notifying that is set, and a time saving mode for notifying that the current gaming state is the time saving game state is set in the time saving game state.

In setting the effect mode corresponding to the current game state, for example, the effect image for notifying the current game state is displayed on the image display device 16 and / or the background image and character image to be displayed on the image display device 16. And, by making the display mode of the effect symbol 16a different from the display mode in other effect modes, the current gaming state is notified.

In step S803, the sub CPU 130a determines the variation effect pattern of 1 based on the variation effect pattern determination table set in step S802 and the effect random number value acquired in step S801.
In addition, the advance notice effect determination table may be used to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the type of the advance notice effect when the advance notice effect is executed.

Next, in step S804, the sub CPU 130a is a variable effect pattern designation command for transmitting the variation effect pattern (and the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect) determined in step S803 to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. Is set in the transmission data storage area. When the variation effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control board 140 or the lamp control board 150, the image display device 16, the effect button device 6A, the audio output device 9, the image display device 16, based on the variation effect pattern designation command, The panel drive device 17, the panel lighting device 18, and the frame lighting device 27 are controlled.

Next, in step S805, the sub CPU 130a sets an effect time timer in order to measure the elapsed time from the start of the variation effect.
Next, in step S806, the sub CPU 130a sets a symbol determination time, which is a period for causing the image display device 16 to stop and display the effect symbol 16a. This symbol determination time is from 0.5 seconds before the end of the variation effect to the end of the variation effect.

(Production input control processing)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the effect input control process by the effect control board 130.
First, in step S811, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 6b. Here, if the sub CPU 130a determines that there is no effect button detection signal (step S811; No), the process ends, and if it is determined that there is an effect button detection signal (step S811; Yes), step S812 is performed. Move the process.

Next, in step S812, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the button operation effect execution enable flag = 01 is set in the storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Here, if the button operation effect execution enable flag = 01 is not set (step S812; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the process, and if the button operation effect execution enable flag = 01 is set (step S812). Yes), the process is moved to step S813.

The button operation effect execution enable flag determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed based on the operation of the effect button 6a by the player. If the flag is "01", it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation, and if the flag is "00", it indicates that it is impossible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation. The flag "01" is set at the start of the operation valid period of the button 6a, and "00" is set when the effect button 6a is operated or the operation valid period ends without the effect button 6a being operated. ..

In step S813, the sub CPU 130a sets the button operation effect execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 140 to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 6a.
Here, the sub CPU 130a transmits the command set in the transmission buffer in step S605 after the effect input control process to the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. The image control board 140 operates the image display device 16 and the sound output device 9 based on the received command, and the lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17, the panel lighting device 18, and the frame based on the received command. The lighting device 27 is operated.

(General CPU main processing)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the image control board 140.
When power is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the control CPU 141, and the control CPU 141 performs the following main processing.

First, in step S901, the centralized CPU 141 performs an initialization process. In this process, the control CPU 141 reads the main processing program from the control ROM 143 in response to the power being turned on, and performs initial settings of various modules of the control CPU 141 and the VDP 200 based on the initialization instruction signal transmitted from the effect control board 130. Instruct.
Further, these initialization OK checks are performed, and if there are no errors in the control CPU 141 itself, the VDP 200, or various modules, the initialization OK signal is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S902, the control CPU 141 performs the effect pattern designation command analysis control process for analyzing the effect pattern designation command (command stored in the receive buffer of the control RAM 142) transmitted from the effect control board 130. When the image control board 140 receives the command transmitted from the effect control board 130, a command reception interrupt process of the image control board 140 (not shown) occurs, and the generated command is stored in the reception buffer. After that, the analysis process of the command received in step S902 is performed.

The effect pattern specification command analysis control process confirms whether or not the effect pattern specification command is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect pattern specification command is not stored in the reception buffer, the process proceeds to step S903 as it is.
If the effect pattern specification command is stored in the reception buffer, a new effect pattern specification command is read, and one or more animation groups to be executed are determined based on the read effect pattern specification command, and each animation group is determined. Determine the animation pattern from. Then, when the animation pattern is determined, the read effect pattern specification command is deleted from the transmission buffer.

In step S903, the control CPU 141 performs animation control processing. In this process, the addresses of various animation scenes are updated based on the "scene switching counter", "weight frame", and "frame counter" updated in step S921 described later and the animation pattern determined in step S902. To do.
In step S904, the general CPU 141 sets the display list from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. Will be generated. Then, when the generation of the display list is completed, the control CPU 141 outputs the display list to the VDP 200. The display list output here is stored in the display list storage area of the VRAM 146 via the CPUI / F203 in the VDP 200.

In step S905, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the FB switching flag = 01.
Here, the FB switching flag becomes the FB switching flag = 01 if the previous drawing of the display list is completed in the V blank interrupt every 1/60 second (about 16.6 ms). That is, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the previous drawing is completed.
If the FB switching flag = 01 (step S905; Yes), the control CPU 140a shifts the process to step S906, and if the FB switching flag = 00 (step S905; No), waits until the FB switching flag = 01. To do.

In step S906, the control CPU 141 sets the FB switching flag = 00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and shifts the process to step S907.
In step S907, the control CPU 141 performs drawing execution start processing. In this process, in order to instruct the VDP 200 to execute drawing on the already output display list, drawing execution start data is set in the drawing register. That is, the execution of drawing on the display list output in step S904 is instructed. After that, the processes of steps S902 to S907 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt is generated.
The interrupt process of the image control board 140 includes at least a drawing end interrupt process performed by inputting a drawing end interrupt signal and a V blank interrupt process performed by inputting a V blank interrupt signal. I have.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a menu screen displayed on the image display device 16 in the present embodiment.
The menu screen 50 shown in FIG. 43 is displayed by the player's operation or the passage of time during the customer waiting effect, and is provided to provide the player with various additional functions and non-game information. ing.
On the menu screen 50, for example, "Pachilog" as a menu item 51, "First pachinko course" as a menu item 52, "Volume / light amount adjustment" as a menu item 53, "Return" as a menu item 54, and selection. A key (cross key) icon 55 and an effect button (decision button) icon 56 are included.

The player can select any of the desired selection items 51 to 54 using the cross key 6f. For example, on the menu screen, one of a plurality of selection items 51 to 54 is highlighted (blinking display, display for changing the color of the selection item, etc.). The highlighted selection items are to be selected. The player switches the highlighted selection item using the cross key 6f, and determines the highlighted selection item by operating the effect button 6a. As a result, the desired selection item is determined. When the selection item is decided, the screen corresponding to the decided selection item is switched from the menu screen and newly displayed.

When the player determines the "pachinko log" of the menu item 51, the pachinko log top menu is displayed. To put it simply, the "pachilog" is a game in which the game machine 1 stores information on the game history.
When the player decides the "first pachinko course" of the menu item 52, the guidance movie for beginners is played.

When the player decides the "volume / light amount adjustment" of the menu item 53, the volume / light amount adjustment operation method explanation screen described below is displayed.
"Volume / light amount adjustment" refers to the volume of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 and the amount of light (emission intensity) of various lighting devices (board lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) as an effect related to the game. This is a function that can be customized to the player's taste.
When the player decides to "return" to the menu item 54, the screen returns to the customer waiting screen (demo screen).
As described above, the menu screen shown in FIG. 43 is displayed by a user operation or the passage of time during the customer waiting effect.
In the following, the display control and screen transition of the customer waiting image including the menu screen by the integrated CPU 141 included in the image control board 140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a customer waiting effect execution process by the integrated CPU 141 included in the image control board 140.
Further, FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a customer waiting effect image including a menu screen displayed on the image display device 16.
In the state in which the mode in which the effect image shown in FIG. 45 (a) is stopped is displayed on the image display device 16 in step S930 of FIG. 44, the control CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a customer waiting command (customer waiting effect) in step S931. Determine whether or not a pattern command) has been received.

When it is determined that the customer waiting command has not been received (step S931; No), the general CPU 141 ends the customer waiting effect execution process, and when it is determined that the customer waiting command has been received, the process proceeds to step S932.
In step S932, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not a predetermined time (20 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting command. As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S932; No), the process of step S932 is repeated until the predetermined time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S932; Yes). In step S933, the overall CPU 141 displays on the image display device 16 the top screen including the effect symbol 16a and the effect button icon 56, which are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 45 (b). In that state, in step S934, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the effect button 6a has been operated.

When it is determined that the effect button 6a has been operated (step S934; Yes), the control CPU 141 performs the menu screen display process in step S935. That is, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the image display device 16 displays the menu top screen including the menu screen 50, the effect button icon 56, and the selection button (cross key 6f) icon 55.
When it is determined that the effect button 6a is not operated (step S934; No), the control CPU 141 determines in step S936 whether or not a predetermined time (25 seconds) has elapsed from the display of FIG. 45 (c). If it has passed, the process is moved to step S935, and the above menu screen display process is performed. In this state, when it is determined that the effect button 6a has been operated (step S937; Yes), does the general CPU 141 select the selection item 51 (pachilog) on the menu screen 50 in step S938? Judge whether or not.

When "Pachilog" is selected (step S938; Yes), the control CPU 141 causes the image display device 16 to display the Pachilog top menu image in step S939.
When "Pachilog" is not selected (step S938; No), the control CPU 141 determines in step S940 whether or not the operation selected the selection item 52 (pachinko course) on the menu screen 50.

When the "pachinko course" is selected (step S940; Yes), the general CPU 141 causes the image display device 16 to display the moving image of the pachinko course in step S941.
When the "pachinko course" is not selected (step S940; No), the general CPU 141 determines in step S942 whether or not the operation selected the selection item 53 (volume / light amount adjustment) on the menu screen 50. ..

When "volume / light amount adjustment" is selected (step S942; Yes), the control CPU 141 causes the image display device 16 to display the volume / light amount adjustment screen in step S943.
When "volume / light amount adjustment" is not selected (step S942; No), the control CPU 141 determines that the selection item 54 (return) has been selected. Therefore, the control CPU 141 returns the process to step S933, and FIG. 45 The top screen of (b) is displayed on the image display device 16.

When the effect button 6a is not operated while displaying the menu screen 50 shown in FIG. 45 (c) in step S937 (step S937; No), the control CPU 141 takes a predetermined time from the display of FIG. 45 (c) in step S946. It is determined whether or not 45 seconds have passed, and if it has passed (step S946; Yes), the process is transferred to step S947, and a demo effect image including the effect button icon 56 is included as shown in FIG. 45 (d). Display (movie).
If it is determined that the effect button 6a has been operated in this state (step S948; Yes), the control CPU 141 returns to step S935 and executes the menu screen display process (FIG. 45 (c)).
When the predetermined time (one playback time of the demo production image (movie), for example, 90 seconds) elapses (step S949; Yes) without the operation of the effect button 6a being performed (step S948; No), the control CPU 141 steps. The process is returned to S933, and the display of FIG. 45B is performed.

In the flow of FIG. 44, the processes of steps S923 to S934 are not performed (the top screen of FIG. 45 (b) is not displayed), and FIG. 45 (c) is formed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the state of FIG. 45 (a). You may change to the menu top screen of.
These screen transition processes on the menu screen 50 may be performed by control by the sub CPU 130a.
Further, the image control board 140 notifies information as a command about which item the player has selected, so that the effect control board 130 is produced according to the player's selection operation (for example, a moving image of a pachinko course). It can be performed.

FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating volume / light amount adjustment including volume / light amount adjustment screen display.
When the "volume / light amount adjustment" item 53 on the menu screen 50 of FIG. 43 is selected, the volume / light amount adjustment operation method screen shown in FIG. 46 (1) is displayed.
In FIG. 46 (1), the cross key icon 60 and the explanations of "the volume can be changed with the up and down buttons" and "the amount of light can be changed with the left and right buttons" are displayed.

When the left and right keys of the cross key 6f are operated, the volume adjustment screen 61 shown in FIG. 46 (2) is displayed. On this screen, the volume gauge 62 (volume value level meter) indicating a plurality of volume stages, "up / down" The explanation of "Change volume with button", the cross key icon 60 for changing the volume is displayed, and when the up and down keys are operated, the volume gauge 62 indicates the volume one step above or below the current volume. At the same time, a volume change confirmation sound is output from the voice output device 9 with a voice corresponding to the changed volume.

When the left and right keys of the cross key 6f are operated, the light amount adjustment screen 71 shown in FIG. 46 (2) is displayed. On this screen, the light amount gauge 72 (light amount value level meter) indicating a plurality of light amount stages, "left and right" Explanation of "change the amount of light with a button", a cross key icon 60 for changing the amount of light is displayed, and when the left and right keys are operated, the amount of light gauge 72 indicates the amount of light one step above or below the current amount of light. At the same time, the sound output device 9 outputs a light amount change confirmation sound corresponding to the changed light amount.

As shown in FIG. 47, the sound type of the volume change confirmation sound is the trumpet sound, and the trumpet sound is output in the scale corresponding to the volume level. For example, when the volume level 1 is set, the trumpet sound of the "do" scale is output, and when the volume level 2 is set, the trumpet sound of the "re" scale is output. The output volume change confirmation sound may be a trumpet sound in a common scale regardless of the volume level.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the sound type of the light amount change confirmation sound is a bell sound, and the bell sound is output in a scale corresponding to the light amount level. For example, when the light intensity level 1 is set, the bell sound of the "do" scale is output, and when the light intensity level 2 is set, the bell sound of the "re" scale is output. It should be noted that the sound of a bell may be produced in a common scale regardless of the output light intensity level.

The player uses the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 and the light amount gauge 72 of the light amount adjustment screen 71 displayed on the image display device 16 and the volume change confirmation sound and the light amount change confirmation sound output from the voice output device 9. , It is possible to surely grasp the volume and the amount of light after the change.
As shown in FIGS. 46 (2) and 46 (3), the shape of the volume gauge 62 and the shape of the light intensity gauge 72 are different, but the same shape (for example, a pie chart or a bar graph that increases or decreases in the left-right direction) may be used. Good. Further, the volume change confirmation sound and the light amount change confirmation sound may be used as a common sound type. Specifically, both the volume change confirmation sound and the light amount change confirmation sound are output as a bell sound.

When the cross key 6f (any of the up / down / left / right keys) is operated, both the volume adjustment screen 61 and the light amount adjustment screen 71 may be displayed. When both the volume adjustment screen 61 and the light intensity adjustment screen 71 are displayed and the up and down keys are operated, the volume gauge 62 is displayed in a state indicating the changed volume, and the sound output device 9 is changed. A volume change confirmation sound corresponding to the later volume is output, and when the left and right keys are operated, the light amount gauge 72 is displayed in a state indicating the changed light amount, and the voice output device 9 corresponds to the changed light amount. The light intensity change confirmation sound is output.

If the up and down keys of the cross key 6g are operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is being displayed, the light amount adjustment screen 71 may also be displayed. The volume adjustment screen 61 continues to be displayed until a predetermined time elapses after the light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed, and disappears after the predetermined time elapses.

(Voice control circuit configuration)
The voice control circuit 300 included in the VDP 200 of the image control board 140 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a configuration of a voice control circuit 300 provided on the image control board 140.
The voice control circuit 300 shown in FIG. 48 has a sound source ROM 400 in which various voice data (effect sound, error sound) are stored as compressed data, and various control commands related to voice output, such as a production sound output command and an error sound output command. Is connected to the control CPU 141 and the like of the image control board 140 that inputs the sound to the voice control circuit 300.

The integrated CPU 141 included in the image control board 140 issues an effect sound output command including the sound required for the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern specification command input from the sub CPU 130a in the voice control circuit 300. (Voice control unit 301) is input.
Further, the control CPU 141 is based on various switch detection information (door opening information, dish full tank information, ball clogging information, illegal radio wave detection information) transmitted from the main control board 110, or the effect control board based on these detection information. An error sound output command is input to the voice control circuit 300 (voice control unit 301) based on the error detection signal and the error release signal transmitted from the 130.
The voice control circuit 300 processes the voice data stored in the sound source ROM 400 according to the control command input from the control CPU 141, inputs the voice data to at least one voice output device (speaker) 9, and outputs the voice as voice. ..

The voice control circuit 300 relates to a plurality of (for example, 40) voice channels (ch0 to ch39) each including a decoding unit 310 and a channel volume control unit 311, and voice data and volume corresponding to control commands input from the control CPU 141. The audio control unit 301 that inputs control commands (control command for decoding unit, volume control command) to the audio channel, the mixer that mixes and outputs the audio signals output from each of the audio channels 0ch to 39ch, and outputs from the mixer. An audio signal processing unit 303 that performs predetermined audio processing (equalization, effect processing, pan, loop, etc.) on the signal, an operational capacitor 304 as an amplification device, and an audio signal that is a digital signal are converted into an analog signal. It is provided with a D / A conversion unit 305 that outputs a signal to an audio output device (speaker) 9.

In the sound source ROM 400, a plurality of (for example, 4096 types) audio data (phrase data) including a background sound (BGM) used in the game machine 1, a production sound for a sound effect, an error sound, etc. are stored as compressed digital data. It is stored.
As the audio data compression method, for example, a modified discrete cosine transform can be used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the audio data does not necessarily have to be compressed.

FIG. 49 is a schematic view showing the configuration of an audio channel in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 49, of the plurality of voice channels (for example, 0ch to 39ch) included in the voice control circuit 300, six voice channels, for example, 0ch to 5ch, are set for error sounds and are used for directing sounds. It cannot be used.
The voice control unit 301 selects a vacant voice channel from the remaining voice channels of 6ch to 39ch and uses it for reproducing the voice data instructed by the control CPU 141.

When a serious error such as opening of the door (opening / closing door 3) occurs in the game machine 1, the error sound can be preferentially generated by lowering or stopping the volume of all the production sounds. ..
By clearly distinguishing the plurality of audio channels included in the audio control circuit 300 for the error sound and the effect sound as described above, it is not necessary to consider which audio channel is outputting the effect sound. Since it is sufficient to control the volume of the audio channel that can be used for sound or stop the output, the processing can be simplified and the audio channel can be used efficiently.
However, the configurations shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 are examples, and in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the audio channels are not distinguished for the error sound and the effect sound, and are confused. May be good.

The audio channel will be described in detail.
The decoding units 310-0 to 310-39 included in each audio channel 0ch to 39ch read (compressed) audio data from the sound source ROM 400 and perform decoding processing according to the decoding unit control command input from the audio control unit 301.
The channel volume control unit 311 included in each voice channel 0ch to 39ch has an output volume for the expanded voice data input from the decoding unit 310 and (designated) based on the volume control command input from the voice control unit 301. (If so) Control fade-in / fade-out, etc.
In the fade-in, the values of the initial volume and the target volume, and the time from the initial volume to the target volume are specified to the channel volume control unit 311.
For the fade-out, the start timing and the target volume are specified for the channel volume control unit 311.

The control CPU 141 and the voice control unit 301 periodically acquire information from the voice channels 0ch to 39ch, and constantly grasp the processing status in these voice channels.
More specifically, the control CPU 141 and the voice control unit 301 periodically acquire and hold the status information of the decoding unit 310 and the channel volume control unit 311 included in each voice channel.
Since the control CPU 141 specifies a voice channel to the voice control unit 301 and outputs the voice, which voice channel is outputting which effect sound and error sound, the volume of each voice channel, the remaining playback time, and the like. Of course, we are aware of the fade-in and fade-out situations.

The status information of the decoding unit 310 in each audio channel includes, for example, "reproduction status", "priority", and "sound number".
The "playback status" is information indicating whether or not the sound is being played on the voice channel, and may be "playing" or "waiting".
The "priority" is the priority of the audio being played on the audio channel, which is preset as "high", "medium", and "low" in the audio management table (FIG. 52) described later. ..
Basically, the priority of the background sound, which has little information suggesting the game result or the game state for the player, is low, and the operation sound of the effect button 6a, the advance notice effect sound, the sound effect, etc. are set to a high priority.

The "sound number" is a number for identifying the sound to be played / played in each voice channel.
In the voice management table (FIG. 52) described later, each voice data is managed in association with this "sound number", and the control CPU 141 instructs the voice control unit 301 of the sound number of the voice to be reproduced. .. As a result, the voice to be captured from the sound source ROM 400 and reproduced by the voice control unit 301 is also specified by the "sound number" for the decoding unit 310 of each voice channel.

The status information of the channel volume control unit 311 in each audio channel includes, for example, "volume" and "fade status".
The "volume" is the volume of the audio currently being played on the audio channel (eg, a percentage of the maximum volume (master volume)).
The "fade status" is whether or not fade-in (FI) / fade-out (FO) is set for the audio currently being played on the audio channel, and if so, whether or not they are completed. Includes information about.

For example, "fade timer 5" indicates that the FI / FO performed using 5 seconds is incomplete.
Further, "fade timer 0" indicates that FI / FO is not specified or has been completed.
The status information of all audio channels 0ch to 39ch includes information of "playback status", "priority", "sound number", "volume", and "fade status" for each audio channel.
The status information of all audio channels is shown below, for example.

Audio channel ch6: Standby Audio channel ch7: Playing, priority "high", sound number 11, current volume 90%, fade timer 0
Audio channel ch8: During playback, priority is "high", sound number 11, current volume 90%, fade timer 0
Audio channel ch9: During playback, priority is "low", sound number 33, current volume 70%, fade timer 0
Audio channel ch10: During playback, priority "medium", sound number 72, current volume 80%, fade timer 0
・ ・ ・ ・
Audio channel ch39: Waiting

(General CPU)
The voice control process performed by the image control board 140 using the voice control circuit 300 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating the voice control process by the image control board 140.
The image control board 140 not only processes the sound output but also processes the image data to be output to the image display device 16. Here, the sound control process for outputting the effect sound and the error sound to the sound output device 9 will be described.
The voice control processing shown in FIG. 50 is the main processing (related to the voice processing) by the integrated CPU 141 included in the image control board 140, and is the control processing for the voice control circuit 300.

First, the control CPU 141 performs the master volume setting process in step S1001.
This master volume setting process is a process for setting the master volume value of the game machine 1 in response to the operation of the volume changeover switch 22 by the game store staff and the cross key 6f (left and right keys) by the player.

Here, the volume setting process in the game machine 1 will be outlined.
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the initial value of the "master volume value" is set by the volume changeover switch 22. This is basically a work that can be performed only by the staff of the game store, and the volume changeover switch 22 is often installed at a position where the player cannot operate, such as the back of the game machine 1.
The volume changeover switch 22 is often composed of a DIP switch, but a gaming machine in which the volume changeover switch 22 is composed of a rotary switch is also known.
In most cases, the volume changeover switch 22 is usually operated by the game store staff before the game store opens or after the store closes.

In addition, the player adjusts (changes) the "master volume value" from the set initial value by using the up key and the down key of the cross key 6f (FIG. 2) according to his / her own convenience and preference. be able to. This work can be performed when the game machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers.
The master volume adjustment work using the cross key 6f may be performed during the fluctuation of the special symbol (during the variation display of the effect symbol 16a). However, the volume adjustment work may not be performed until 15 frames have elapsed from the start of fluctuation.
By displaying the adjustment screen at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a on the image display device 16, the inconvenience that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the variable display of the effect symbol has been started is surely avoided, and the effect is produced. It is possible to make the player surely recognize that the variable display of the symbol has been started.
Further, the volume adjustment work cannot be performed during the symbol confirmation display period in which the effect symbol 16a is displayed as a fixed stop display for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds).
When the master volume can be adjusted during the symbol confirmation display period of the effect symbol 16a, the effect symbol (judgment symbol) is displayed as a final stop display (that is, the result of the special game determination) by displaying the adjustment screen. It is possible to surely avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize, and to make the player recognize that the determination symbol has been stopped and displayed.

The "master volume value" is a comprehensive volume setting value given to all the plurality of voice channels included in the voice control circuit 300, but in the voice control circuit 300 according to the present embodiment, it is included in each voice channel. It is possible to give a sub-volume value to which the volume adjustment with respect to the master volume value is given to the above-mentioned channel volume control unit 311 (input a different volume value only for a specific audio channel).
Therefore, the relative volume difference (volume ratio) between each voice channel can be adjusted, and the important voice can be output and emphasized with a louder sound as compared with other voices.

The "master volume value" can be switched step by step from "1" to "10" using the volume changeover switch 22 by the DIP switch or the left and right keys, and depending on the volume changeover switch 22, "large" within that range. , "Medium", "Small", and "Eco" can be set as the initial value of the master volume value.

When the volume selector switch 22 is switched to "Large", the master volume value is "10", when it is switched to "Medium", the master volume value is "7", and the volume selector switch 22 is "Small" or "Eco". When switched to, the master volume value "4" is set.
When the "master volume value" is set to "eco", the board lighting device 18 and the frame lighting device 27 are turned off while the game machine 1 is in the customer waiting state (eco mode). ..
The "master volume value" set by using the volume changeover switch 22 is referred to as a "hard volume value" in the present embodiment.
When the volume changeover switch 22 is operated when the game machine 1 is not energized, the control CPU 141 sets the hard volume value according to the output value of the volume changeover switch 22 at the time of starting up the game machine 1. The hard volume value is stored in the control RAM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, when waiting for a customer or when the special symbol fluctuates, the master volume value (initial value) set by the volume changeover switch 22 is set to the player's favorite volume by using the up and down keys of the cross key 6f. Adjust between "1" and "10" (normal mode).
This adjusted master volume value is referred to as a "soft volume value" in the present embodiment.
When the initial value of the volume changeover switch 22 is "eco", the player cannot make adjustments using the cross key 6f (eco mode).
The soft volume value adjusted by using the up and down keys of the cross key 6f is stored in the control RAM 142 of the image control board 140.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the customer is waiting or the special symbol fluctuates, the light intensity (brightness) of the panel lighting device 18 and the frame lighting device 27 is set step by step using the left and right keys of the cross key 6f. It can be adjusted to (“1” to “10”).

The devices capable of adjusting the amount of light step by step (“1” to “10”) using the left and right keys of the cross key 6f are so-called decorative lamps such as the panel lighting device 18 and the frame lighting device 27. The lighting device is limited to the so-called lighting device, and the backlight of the image display device 16 and various LEDs of the game display board 19 are devices that are not subject to the light amount adjustment. That is, the player cannot arbitrarily adjust the amount of light of the backlight of the image display device 16 and the various LEDs of the game display board 19.

Returning to the flowchart of FIG. 50, the control CPU 151 performs the error sound setting process in step S1002.
This is an error sound setting / output process according to an instruction from the upper board (main control board 110, effect control board 130). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.
Next, the control CPU 151 performs the effect sound setting process in step S1003.
This is an effect sound setting / output process according to an instruction from the upper board (effect control board 130). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.
Next, in step S1004, the control CPU 151 performs an output processing for the voice currently being output.
This is a control process for the voice currently output by the voice control circuit 300. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.
Next, in step S1005, the control CPU 151 performs a command output process for outputting a control command to the voice control circuit 300.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a master volume setting process by the image control board 140.
In step S1101, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the hard volume value has been changed by using the volume changeover switch 22.
When it is determined that the hard volume value has been changed (step S1101; Yes), the control CPU 141 sets the changed hard volume value as the master volume value in step S1102.
When the volume (hard volume value) is set by the volume changeover switch 22, an announcement such as "The hard volume value is set to large (medium, small, eco)" is used as a notification sound to notify the volume (hard volume value). Sound can be output.

Although the initialization process for initializing the game machine 1 to a predetermined initial state (clearing the stored contents of the main RAM and the stack area) has been described in FIG. 12, when the game machine 1 is initialized, the hard volume The volume (master volume value) is reset to the value.
As will be described later, the image control board 140 outputs a notification sound (notification sound for turning on the power) notifying that the game machine 1 has been initialized from the voice output device 9.
Such notification sounds are, for example, announcement sounds such as "power is turned on", "initialized", and "RAM is cleared", and image control is performed together with such announcement sounds. The board 140 causes the image display device 16 to display an initialization information image of words such as "power is turned on", "initialized", and "RAM is cleared".

Returning to the flowchart of FIG. 51, when it is determined that there is no change in the hard volume value (step S1101; No), the control CPU 141 changes the soft volume value using the cross key (up / down key) 6f in step S1103. Determine if it was broken.
When it is determined that the soft volume value has been changed (step S1103; Yes), the control CPU 141 sets the changed soft volume value as the master volume value in step S1102.
If there is no change in the soft volume value (step S1103; No), the control CPU 141 ends the volume setting process this time.
The hard volume value can be changed at all times using the volume changeover switch 22, and is immediately reflected in the volume.
On the other hand, there is a limit to the period during which the soft volume value can be changed using the cross key 6f. The period during which the soft volume value (volume) can be changed will be described later.

Next, the error sound and effect sound setting processing by the image control board 140 will be described.
As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the control CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is based on the variation effect pattern specified by the variation effect pattern designation command supplied from the effect control board 130 which is the upper board. The necessary voice is selected from the voice management table, and the voice control circuit 300 is instructed to output it.
Regarding the error sound, various sensor detection results (dish full tank detection result, door open detection result, ball clogging detection result, illegal radio wave detection result) supplied from the main control board 110, or error detection based on the detection result. Based on the signal and the error release signal, the necessary voice is selected from the voice management table, and the voice control circuit 300 is instructed to output it.

The sound used in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a voice management table included in the image control board 140.
In the voice management table shown in FIG. 52, each error sound, effect sound, its priority, and stereo / monaural type are managed in association with the sound number.
The priority is a degree for determining the sound to be played with priority.
In the voice management table of FIG. 52, the sound number 1 is an error sound emitted when the door (opening / closing door 3) is opened, and the sound number 2 is illegal by the magnetic sensor 50 installed on the game board 4. This is an error sound that is emitted when a radio wave is detected. Further, the sound number 3 is an error sound emitted when the ball is clogged, and the sound number 4 is an error sound emitted when the storage plate 5 of the game ball is full.
When the occurrence of these events is detected by various sensors connected to the main control board 110, the detection signal is input from the main control board 110 to the image control board 140 via the effect control board 130 or directly. ..
As a result, the control CPU 141 selects a sound number according to various events occurring in the game machine 1, and transmits an output command to the voice control circuit 300.

The priority of these error sounds is set according to the importance of the error, and the priority is set to "high" for opening the door or detecting illegal radio waves that lead to or cause fraudulent activity. Has been done.
Although "ball jam" is an important error, it is less important than cheating, so the priority is set to "medium".
The notification when the storage plate 5 of the game ball is full is clearly less important than the above, so the priority is "low".

The error notification is controlled so that only one error sound with high importance can be heard.
For example, if the door opening is detected while the dish full tank notification of sound number 4 (importance "low") is generated, the error sound of sound number 1 is generated and the error sound of sound number 4 is generated. Mute. Then, when the door open state is resolved, the error sound of sound number 1 is stopped, and the volume of the error sound of sound number 4 is restored.
When a sound number with a higher priority occurs, even if an event with a lower priority occurs, no new error sound for that event occurs.
If events of the same priority occur in parallel, an error sound is output for the event that occurred later.

The volume of the error sound is set so that it cannot be adjusted by the operation of the player and the staff of the game store. The output volume of the error sound is one volume value at any time, and the volume value is the maximum among the volume values of various sounds output from the game machine 1. That is, regardless of the current master volume value, the master volume value "10" is output. Alternatively, it may be output at a dedicated volume value exceeding the master volume value "10".

Sound numbers 11 and later are directing sounds. For example, the sound numbers 11 and 12 are BGMs that are reproduced and output during the fluctuation, and the sound numbers 13 are BGMs that are reproduced and output during the jackpot game.
The priority is set lower than the error sound output in the serious situation (second situation).
In addition, a fluctuation start sound, a fluctuation stop sound, an operation sound of the effect button 6a, a light amount change confirmation sound when performing a light amount adjustment operation using the left and right keys of the cross key 6f, and a cross, which are not shown in FIG. The production sound includes an operation confirmation sound and the like when adjusting the volume and light amount using the key 6f.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an error sound setting process by the image control board 140.
In step S1201, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not various error detection signals have been input from the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) (whether or not an error has occurred).
When it is determined that the error detection signal has been input (step S1201; Yes), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1202 whether or not the effect sound is currently being output.

When there is an effect sound currently being output (step S1202; Yes), the control CPU 141 saves the current master volume value in the control RAM 141a and a new master volume for lowering the current master volume value in step S1203. Set the value (set the volume value reset command that lowers the volume of the production sound in the transmission buffer). Alternatively, the master volume value may be set so that the volume of the effect sound is zero (= not output) or the volume is inaudible.
That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the error sound is output, the volume of the effect sound is reduced so that the error sound can be heard more easily.

Next, the control CPU 141 determines the content of the error that has occurred in the game machine 1 based on the error detection signal.
As described above, the errors that occur in the game machine 1 have different importance.
In step S1204, the control CPU 141 has a relatively minor error (the first error of "low" or "medium" priority) such as ball jam or dish full detection (first error of "low" or "medium" priority) in the game machine 1. 1 is in the first situation) or not.
When it is determined that a relatively minor error has occurred (step S1204; Yes), the control CPU 141 sets the error sounds of the sound numbers 3 and 4 corresponding to these errors to the current master volume value in step S1205. Regardless, the error sound output command that outputs at the maximum volume is set in the transmission buffer, and the error sound setting process ends.

The volume according to the master volume value does not necessarily mean the volume according to the master volume value itself.
For example, if the master volume value is set between "1" and "3", the error sound is output at the volume value "2" and the master volume value is set between "4" and "7". If so, the error sound can be output at the volume value "5", and if the master volume value is output between "8" and "10", the error sound can be output at the volume value "9". ..
When the master volume value is "3" and the volume value of the error sound is "2", the volume of the error sound is lower than that of the production sound, but the error sound with the priority "low" (dish full). The tongue) may be output at a volume lower than that of the production sound.
As described above, the error sound for notifying a relatively minor error (first error) is an error sound that can depend on the master volume value, and can be output at a volume corresponding to the master volume value.
On the other hand, the error sound for notifying a relatively serious error (second error) described below is an error sound that does not depend on the master volume value (independent), and has a predetermined volume regardless of the master volume value. It can be output with.

When it is determined that the generated error is not relatively minor (step S1204; No), the general CPU 141 determines in step S1205 that the error generated in the game machine 1 is the door open state or the magnetic sensor detection (second step). Determine if it is a serious one (error) or the like (the game machine is in the second situation).
When it is determined that a serious error has occurred (step S1206; Yes), the general CPU 141 sets the error sounds of the sound numbers 1 and 2 corresponding to these errors in step S1207 regardless of the current master volume value. Set the error sound output command to output at the maximum volume in the transmission buffer and end the error sound setting process.

When it is determined in step S1202 that there is no effect sound currently being output (step S1202; No), the control CPU 141 directly shifts the process to step S1204.
When it is determined in step S1201 that no error detection signal is input (step S1201; No), the control CPU 141 determines whether or not an error release signal is input from the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) in step S1208 (error). Is resolved) is determined.

When it is determined that the error release signal has been input (step S1208; Yes), the control CPU 141 returns the master volume value to the master volume value saved in step S1203 in step S1209, and "stops the error sound". Set the "command" in the transmission buffer (set the volume value reset command that returns the volume of the production sound), and end the error sound setting process this time.
When it is determined that the error release signal has not been input (step S1208; No), the control CPU 141 ends the error sound setting process this time.
In the flowchart shown in FIG. 53, a case where a single error occurs is described, but when a plurality of errors occur at the same time, each error is transmitted from the main control board 110. The error sound output command may be set based on the error detection signal.
When the error release signal is input, the master volume restoration process in step S1209 may be performed when it is determined that the errors have been released for all the errors.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect sound setting process by the image control board 140.
In step S1301, the control CPU 141 analyzes the variation effect pattern designation command.

Next, in step S1302, the integrated CPU 141 determines the sound number designated for the voice control circuit 300 based on the variation effect pattern designated by the variation effect pattern designation command. The sound number may be specified in the variation effect pattern specification command itself.
Next, in step S1303, the control CPU 141 confirms the master volume value stored in the control RAM 142.
Next, the control CPU 141 performs the channel selection process in step S1304.
Further, in step S1305, the general CPU 141 sets in the transmission buffer a "directing sound output command" including the sound number determined in step S1302, the audio channel selected in step S1304, and the volume based on the master volume value confirmed in step S1303. Then, the voice control circuit 300 is made to reproduce the effect sound.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the voice control circuit 300 includes 40 voice channels and can simultaneously reproduce up to 40 voices.
When reproducing and outputting the effect sound, the control CPU 141 selects from 34 vacant channels (no sound is output) from the 34 channels excluding the 6 sound channels set for the error sound. An effect sound output command including information on the selected voice channel, sound number, and volume is input to the voice control circuit 300.
The voice control unit 301 that controls the voice control circuit 300 inputs the voice data instructed by the control CPU 141 to the decoding unit 310 of the designated voice channel and starts playback.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a notification sound for notifying the player of the confirmation of the jackpot winning may be output during the variable effect of the jackpot, or at the time of transition to the reach effect.
Such a notification sound may be output at the maximum volume regardless of the set master volume value.
In this case, when setting the effect sound output command for instructing the output of the jackpot confirmation notification sound in step S1305, the control CPU 141 specifies the maximum volume sub-volume value in addition to the sound number and voice channel of the jackpot confirmation notification sound. To do.
At this time, it may be controlled to lower the sub-volume value of the production sound other than the jackpot confirmation notification sound (volume value reset command).
By doing so, the jackpot confirmation notification sound, which is the most important production sound for the player, can be reliably heard without being buried in other production sounds, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating processing during audio output by the image control board 140.
In step S1401, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not there is an effect sound currently being output by the voice control circuit 300.
When it is determined that there is an effect sound being output (step S1401; Yes), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1402 whether or not the master volume value has been changed by the master volume setting process (FIG. 50: step S1001). ..

When the master volume value has been changed (step S1402; Yes), in step S1403, the control CPU 141 sets the volume value reset command based on the changed master volume value in the transmission buffer and sets the voice control circuit 300. Send.
If there is no sound being output (step S1401; No), or if there is no change in the master volume value (step S1402; No), the control CPU 141 ends the current output processing.

When it is determined in step S1402 that there is no change in the master volume value (step S1402; No), the control CPU 141 ex post-volume adjustment or fade-in (FI) in the effect sound currently being output in step 1404. Determine if there is something that requires fade-out (FO).
When there is such an effect sound (step S1404; Yes), the control CPU 141 sets the volume value reset command for the necessary audio channel in step S1405, and ends the current output processing.

(Soft volume adjustment processing)
The above-mentioned adjustment of the soft volume value can be performed by using the cross key 6f (left / right key) in the waiting state for customers.
The adjustment of the soft volume value using the cross key 6f (up / down key) is performed not only in the waiting state for customers but also in response to the power of the game machine 1 being turned on during the variable display of the special symbol (directed symbol). It can also be performed after the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C to be executed is completed. However, the adjustment of the soft volume value cannot be performed from the reception of the symbol confirmation command to the end of the symbol confirmation time (0.5 seconds).

The soft volume value adjustment process on the image control board 140 will be described below.
The scale of the trumpet sound output as the volume change confirmation sound corresponds to each of the volume values from "1" to "10" as shown in the voice management table (FIG. 52).
That is, the volume value "1" is the sound of "do", the volume value "2" is the sound of "re", the volume value "3" is the sound of "mi", and the volume value "4" is the sound of "fa". Volume value "5" is the sound of "so", volume value "6" is the sound of "la", volume value "7" is the sound of "shi", volume value "8" is one octave higher than "do" The sound, the volume value "9" corresponds to the sound of "re" one octave higher, and the volume value "10" corresponds to the sound of "mi" one octave higher.

56 and 57 are confirmations output from the volume adjustment screen 61 and the sound output device 9 displayed on the image display device 16 when the cross key 6f is operated in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment in the customer waiting state. It is a figure explaining the sound (current volume confirmation sound, volume change confirmation sound).
Here, the customer waiting state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 6f is possible is the state shown in FIGS. 45 (a), (b), and (d).
Even in the waiting state for customers, when the menu screen 50 shown in FIG. 45C is displayed, it is not possible to adjust the volume or the amount of light using the cross key 6f. This is because the cross key 6f is used for menu operation.
However, in the game machine 1 in which the volume and light amount adjustment items (item 53 of "volume / light amount adjustment" shown in FIG. 43) can be selected from the menu items included in the menu screen 50, that item is selected. After that, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment can be performed by using the cross key 6f on the "volume adjustment screen" and the "light amount adjustment screen".

For example, when the master volume value (hard volume value) is "7" (current volume = 7), as shown in FIG. 56 (1), the three effect symbols 16a notify the loss without reach in the variable effect. "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" is displayed as a fixed stop, and the customer waiting state shown in Fig. 56 (2) is entered, and the volume can be adjusted (soft volume can be changed) using the cross key 6f. Suppose it became.
Here, the customer waiting state means a state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed, but the requirement may include the normal symbol variation display and the auxiliary game not being executed. ..

As shown in FIG. 56 (2), the image display device 16 displays "volume can be adjusted with the up and down buttons" and "light intensity can be adjusted with the left and right buttons", and the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 6f (change of soft volume). Notifies the player that this is possible. At this point, the volume cannot be changed.
In FIG. 56 (2), the display of the effect button icon 56 in the customer waiting state of FIG. 45 (b) and the display of the menu screen 50 by operating the effect button 6a of FIG. 45 (c) will be omitted.
In the customer waiting state, the effect symbol 16a (determination symbol) of the stop mode is displayed.
Further, when the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f, the cross key icon 60 is displayed on the image display device 16. Instead of or in addition to the display of the cross key icon 60, the cross key 6f may be controlled to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 56 (3), when the upper key (volume up button) is pressed, the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed in the central area of the display unit, and the volume control circuit 300 confirms the current volume of the voice. A sound (for example, the voice of "Pyrroline ♪") is output from the voice output device 9 at a volume of "7". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed at the current volume "7". The voice of the current volume confirmation sound is different from the voice of the volume change confirmation sound. The current volume confirmation sound may be the same sound as the volume change confirmation sound (sound of scale). In this case, the voice of "shi" corresponding to the volume "7" is output at the volume "7".

In this way, if the up / down keys are operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed in the customer waiting state, the volume gauge 62 indicating the currently set volume is displayed without changing the volume, and the volume gauge 62 is displayed. Since the current volume confirmation sound is output at the currently set volume, the player easily and surely desires to change the volume while grasping the currently set volume when adjusting the volume. It is possible to adjust the volume.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (4), when the up key (volume up button) is pressed again while the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed, the master volume value becomes “8” and the volume is increased. The voice of "do ↑" corresponding to "8" is output from the voice output device 9 at a volume of "8". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 increases by one from the volume "7" and is displayed at the volume "8".
In this way, the voice of the current volume confirmation sound corresponding to the current volume and the voice of the volume change confirmation sound corresponding to the changed volume are different, so that the player can surely recognize that the volume has been changed. Can be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (5), when the upper key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "9", and the voice control circuit 300 receives the voice of "Re ↑" corresponding to the volume "9". Is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "9". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 is increased by one from the volume "8" and displayed at the volume "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (6), when the upper key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "10", and the voice control circuit 300 sets the voice of "Mi ↑" corresponding to the volume "10". Is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "10". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 is increased by one from the volume "9" and displayed at the volume "10" (MAX volume).
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (7), even if the upper key is further pressed, the volume has reached the MAX volume (upper limit), so the volume is not changed to a louder volume. Therefore, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 still indicates the volume "10" (that is, the volume does not change), and the volume change confirmation sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (8), when the down key (volume down button) is pressed, the master volume value becomes “9”, and the voice control circuit 300 sets the “re” corresponding to the volume “9”. The sound of "↑" is output from the sound output device 9 at a volume of "9". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume "9", which is one less than the volume "10".
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (9), when the lower key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes “8”, and the voice control circuit 300 uses the voice “do ↑” corresponding to the volume “8”. Is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "8". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume "8", which is one less than the volume "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (10), when the lower key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "7", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "shi" corresponding to the volume "7". The sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "7". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 is reduced by one from the volume "8" and displayed at the volume "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (11), when the lower key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "6", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "la" corresponding to the volume "6". The sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "6". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume "6", which is one less than the volume "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (12), after the volume is changed in FIG. 56 (11) (after the down key is operated), the up key or the down key cannot be operated and the effect button 6a is also operated. If a predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) elapses without the process, the volume adjustment screen 61 is hidden. Further, even if the effect button 6a is operated before the predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) has elapsed, the volume adjustment screen 61 is hidden.

After that, when the customer waiting state continues, as shown in FIG. 57 (13), with the menu screen 50 not displayed and the volume adjustment screen 61 not displayed, the down key (volume down). When the button) is pressed, the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed, and the volume control circuit 300 outputs the current volume confirmation sound (for example, the voice of “Pyrroline ♪”) from the voice output device 9 at the volume “6”. Let me. At the same time, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed at the volume "6".
Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), when the lower key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "5", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "So" corresponding to the volume "5". The sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "5". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 is reduced by one from the volume "6" and displayed at the volume "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (15), when the lower key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "4", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "fa" corresponding to the volume "4". The sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "4". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume "4", which is one less than the volume "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (16), when the lower key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "3", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "mi" corresponding to the volume "3". The sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "3". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume "3", which is one less than the volume "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (17), when the lower key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "2", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "re" corresponding to the volume "2". The sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of "2". At the same time, the volume gauge 62 is reduced by one from the volume "3" and displayed at the volume "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (18), when the lower key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "1", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "do" corresponding to the volume "1". The audio output device 9 outputs the sound at a volume of "1" (MIN volume). At the same time, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 is reduced by one from the volume "2" and displayed at the volume "1" (MIN volume).
Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (19), even if the lower key is further pressed, the volume has reached the MIN volume (lower limit value), so the volume is not changed to a volume lower than that. Therefore, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 remains at the volume "1", and the volume change confirmation sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (20), when the up key (volume up button) is pressed, the master volume value becomes “2”, and the voice control circuit 300 sets the “re” corresponding to the volume “2”. Is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of “2”. At the same time, the volume gauge 62 increases by one from the volume "1" and is displayed at the volume "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (21), the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the volume adjustment screen 61 is hidden. Then, when a predetermined period (15 frames) elapses from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 6f.

In this way, when any of the up and down keys of the cross key 6f is operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed in the waiting state for customers, the volume gauge 62 indicating the currently set volume is displayed. When any of the up and down keys of the cross key 6f is operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed and the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed, the display of the volume gauge 61 is changed corresponding to the operation. Updated to volume.
Further, when any of the up and down keys of the cross key 6f is operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed, the current volume confirmation sound is output at the currently set volume, and the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed. When any of the up and down keys of the cross key 6f is operated in this state, a volume change confirmation sound is output at a volume changed corresponding to the operation.

In addition, the volume change can be adjusted within a predetermined volume change range, and cannot be changed to a volume higher than the predetermined MAX volume (upper limit value), and the predetermined MIN volume (lower limit value) cannot be changed. It is not possible to change the volume to a volume lower than).
In addition, the volume change confirmation sound can output sound within a predetermined volume change range, and cannot output sound at a volume higher than the predetermined MAX volume, and is higher than the predetermined MIN volume. It is not possible to output sound at a low volume.
It should be noted that the volume of the volume change confirmation sound may be raised or lowered according to the operation of the up and down keys without raising or lowering the scale of the volume change confirmation sound. In that case, only one volume change confirmation sound needs to be prepared. For example, the volume of the music in the customer waiting state output from the voice output device 9 during the customer waiting state is raised or lowered. That is, the music in the waiting state for customers may be diverted as the volume change confirmation sound.

If the cross key 6f is not operated for 120 seconds after receiving the customer waiting command, the master volume value is reset to the initial volume (hard volume value) set by the volume changeover switch 22.
In the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, the volume adjustment using the cross key 6f in the waiting state for customers is described. However, as described above, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment using the cross key 6f are variable effects. It is also possible during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a in (excluding the symbol confirmation display period).

FIG. 58 illustrates the volume adjustment of the sound (BGM for variable effect, effect sound) output during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 58 (1), in the variable effect, the three effect symbols 16a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the display mode "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" indicating the determination result of the loss without reach. It is assumed that the master volume value (hard volume value) of is "7". Volume adjustment using the cross key 6f is not possible during the symbol confirmation display period in which the effect symbol 16a is fixedly stopped for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the jackpot determination. (Adjustment operation using the cross key 6f is invalid, volume change is invalid).
During the symbol confirmation display period, as described above, the change of the master volume value by adjusting the soft volume value is not allowed, but the change of the master volume value by adjusting the hard volume value is allowed.

As shown in FIG. 58 (2), the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is started in response to the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the BGM for the variation effect is output from the voice output device 9. When a predetermined period (15 frames) elapses from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 6f.
Next, after the above predetermined period has elapsed, when the upper key (volume up button) is pressed while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 58 (3), the master volume value Is changed from "7" to "8", the BGM being output is continuously output at the changed volume "8", and the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed. On the volume adjustment screen 61, the volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume of “8”.
The volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed in a visible display size smaller than the display size when waiting for customers, and is at a position that does not overlap with the variable display of the effect symbol 16a of the display unit (for example, near the right end of the display unit). ) Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (4), when the upper key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "9", and the volume gauge 62 increases by one from the volume "8" to the volume "9". The BGM that is displayed and being output is continuously output at the changed volume "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), when the upper key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "10" (MAX volume), and the volume gauge 62 increases by one from the volume "9" to increase the volume. The BGM displayed at "10" and being output is continuously output at the changed volume "10" (MAX volume).
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), even if the upper key is further pressed, the volume is not changed to a higher volume because the MAX volume (upper limit value) of the volume "10" has been reached. Therefore, the volume gauge 62 remains at the volume "10", and the volume of the BGM being output is not changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (7), after the up key is pressed in FIG. 58 (6), the up key or the down key is not operated and the effect button 6a is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 1. The volume adjustment screen 61 is continuously displayed even after the elapse of (0 seconds) (that is, the volume adjustment screen 61 is not hidden).
After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (8), the left and right effect symbols 16a are temporarily stopped at the same symbol, the central effect symbol 16a is in a fluctuating reach state, and the specific effect expected to execute the jackpot game is not executed. Normal reach production is executed.

If the down key is pressed during the execution of the normal reach effect, the master volume value becomes "9", the volume gauge 62 is displayed at the volume "9", which is one less than the MAX volume "10", and the BGM being output. Is continuously output at the changed volume "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (9), when the three effect symbols 16a are temporarily stopped in the display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" indicating the determination result of the normal reach loss. When the down key is pressed, the master volume value becomes "8", the volume gauge 62 is displayed at the volume "8", which is one less than the volume "9", and the BGM being output is the changed volume "8". Is continuously output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (10), the three effect symbols 16a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" of the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal reach loss. Then, since the volume adjustment using the cross key 6f becomes impossible, the volume adjustment screen 61 is hidden.
When the symbol confirmation display period (0.5 seconds) ends, as shown in FIG. 58 (11), the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is started. The volume adjustment screen 61 is hidden at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, and when a predetermined period (15 frames) elapses after the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is started, the volume adjustment using the cross key 6f is performed. It will be possible.

In this way, while the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is being executed, if any of the up and down keys is operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed, the sound being output (BGM for variable effect, effect sound). ) Is continuously output at the changed volume, and the current volume confirmation sound and volume change confirmation sound are not output.
If the current volume confirmation sound or volume change confirmation sound is output during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol 16a, the output sound (BGM for variation effect, production sound) and the confirmation sound sound are confused. It is possible to reliably avoid the inconvenience that the effect of the sound effect due to the sound (BGM, effect sound) being output is reduced.

Further, during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, if any of the up and down keys is operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed, the display size is smaller than the display size in the customer waiting state. Since the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed near the right end of the display unit that has a display size and does not overlap with the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, and the volume gauge 62 is displayed at the changed volume, the player can change the volume. It is possible to surely recognize that it has been damaged and that the effect symbol 16a is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, a special production image (for example, battle production, mission production, etc.) performed in the SP reach production or SPSP reach production is being displayed, a development notification image (for example, "super reach !!" is displayed) is being displayed, or Even during the display of a specific effect image such as an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect button 6a, the volume adjustment screen 61 has a visible display size smaller than the display size in the waiting state for customers, and these effect images ( It is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the video).

The volume adjustment screen 61 may be displayed at a position overlapping a part or all of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a.
In this case, the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed on a layer higher than the variable display of the effect symbol 16a. In that case, it is desirable that the volume adjustment screen 61 is represented by an image having a transparency that does not make it difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the effect symbol 16a. By doing so, it is possible to recognize the volume adjustment screen 61 and also to recognize the effect display located below the volume adjustment screen 61, and it is possible to suppress misunderstanding of the game result of the player and to have an appropriate volume. An adjustment function can be provided. In addition, while displaying a special production image (for example, battle production, mission production, etc.) performed by reach production, SP reach production, or SPSP reach production, and displaying a development notification image (for example, "Super Reach !!" is displayed). Alternatively, the same applies to the case where a specific effect image such as an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect button 6a is displayed.

Regarding the volume adjustment of the jackpot game sound (big hit game BGM, effect sound) output in the jackpot game, the sound output during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a (variable effect BGM, effect sound). It is the same as the volume adjustment of.
If any of the up and down keys is operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed during the jackpot game, the BGM for the jackpot production during output is continuously output at the changed volume, and the current volume is displayed. No confirmation sound or volume change confirmation sound is output.

While the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is being executed, if any of the up and down keys is operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed, the current volume confirmation sound and the volume change confirmation sound are output. It may be. In this case, both the variable effect BGM and the confirmation sound are output from the audio output device 9.
FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a confirmation sound (current volume confirmation sound, volume change confirmation sound) output from the volume adjustment screen 61 and the voice output device 9 displayed on the image display device 16.

As shown in FIG. 59 (1), in the variable effect, the three effect symbols 16a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the display mode "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" indicating the determination result of the loss without reach. It is assumed that the master volume value (hard volume value) of is "7". During the symbol confirmation display period of the effect symbol 16a, it is impossible to adjust the volume using the cross key 6f (the adjustment operation using the cross key 6f is invalid, the volume change is invalid).

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (2), the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is started in response to the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the BGM for the variation effect is output from the voice output device 9. When a predetermined period (15 frames) elapses from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 6f.
Next, after the above predetermined period has elapsed, when the up key (volume up button) is pressed while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), the volume adjustment screen is displayed. 61 is displayed, and the volume control circuit 300 outputs the current volume confirmation sound (for example, the voice of “Pyrroline ♪”) at the currently set volume “8”. The volume gauge 62 is displayed at the currently set volume "8". Therefore, the volume of the BGM being output is not changed.
The voice of the current volume confirmation sound may be the same as the voice of the volume change confirmation sound. In this case, the sound of "do ↑" corresponding to the volume "8" is output at the volume "8".

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (4), when the upper key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "9", and the volume control circuit 300 sets the voice of "Re ↑" corresponding to the volume "9". Is output at a volume of "9", and the volume of the BGM being output is changed to a volume of "9". The volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume "9", which is one more than the volume "8".
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (5), when the upper key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "10", and the volume control circuit 300 sets the voice of "Mi ↑" corresponding to the volume "10". Is output at a volume of "10", and the volume of the BGM being output is changed to a volume of "10". The volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume of "10" (MAX), which is one more than the volume of "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (6), even if the upper key is further pressed, the volume has reached the MAX volume (upper limit value), so the volume is not changed to a higher volume. Therefore, the volume gauge 62 of the volume adjustment screen 61 remains at the volume "10" (that is, the volume does not change), and the volume change confirmation sound is not output. Therefore, the volume of the BGM being output is not changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (7), after the up key is pressed in FIG. 59 (6), the up key or the down key is not operated and the effect button 6a is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 1. The volume adjustment screen 61 is continuously displayed even after the elapse of (0 seconds) (that is, the volume adjustment screen 61 is not hidden).
After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (8), the normal reach effect is executed. If the down key is pressed during the execution of the normal reach effect, the master volume value becomes "9", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "Re ↑" corresponding to the volume "9" at the volume "9". At the same time, the volume of the BGM being output is changed to the volume "9". The volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume "9", which is one less than the volume "10".

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (9), when the three effect symbols 16a are temporarily stopped in the display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" indicating the determination result of the normal reach loss. When the down key is pressed, the master volume value becomes "8", and the voice control circuit 300 outputs the voice of "do ↑" corresponding to the volume "8" at the volume "8" and the BGM being output. Change the volume of to the volume "8". The volume gauge 62 is displayed at a volume "8", which is one less than the volume "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (10), the three effect symbols 16a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" of the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal reach loss. Then, since the volume adjustment using the cross key 6f becomes impossible, the volume adjustment screen 61 is hidden. When the symbol confirmation display period (0.5 seconds) ends, as shown in FIG. 59 (11), the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is started. The volume adjustment screen 61 is hidden at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, and when a predetermined period (15 frames) elapses after the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is started, the volume adjustment using the cross key 6f is performed. It will be possible.

In this way, if the up and down keys are operated while the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed, but the volume is not changed and the currently set volume is not displayed. The volume gauge 62 is displayed, and the current volume confirmation sound is output at the currently set volume. Therefore, when adjusting the volume, the player grasps the currently set volume and outputs the volume. Since the change is made, it is possible to easily and surely adjust the desired volume.

When the hard volume value is changed (set) by using the volume changeover switch 22 while the volume gauge 62 is displayed in FIGS. 56 to 59, the volume gauge 62 indicating the newly set volume is not displayed.
On the contrary, while the volume gauge 62 is displayed in FIGS. 56 to 58, either the volume changeover switch 22 is used to change (set) the hard volume value or the cross key 6f is used to adjust the soft volume value. Alternatively, the volume gauge 62 indicating the newly set volume may be displayed.
The volume gauge 62 and the light intensity gauge 72 displayed according to the volume setting performed by the cross key 6f and the volume changeover switch 22 are displayed by being controlled by the image control board 140.

(Soft volume adjustment processing)
FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating the soft volume adjustment process (volume adjustment using the up and down keys) by the image control board 140 described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.
As will be described later, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, a predetermined command is output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130), and the effect control is received. By controlling the image control board 140 by the board 130, the player can adjust (change) the volume (master volume).
Therefore, the flowchart described below is based on the premise that a predetermined command is normally received from the main control board 110.
Receiving normally means that the command is received in a perfect state, and not only when the command is not received at all due to a cable or signal line being dropped, but also due to a cause such as noise, the command (signal) is sent. If there is an abnormality or a defect, it cannot be considered that the signal was received normally.

In step S1601, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the power of the game machine 1 is in the state at the time of power-on.
When the control CPU 141 determines that the state is at the time of power-on (step S1601; Yes), the process shifts to step S1602, and when it is determined that the state is not at the time of power-on (step S1601; No), the process proceeds to step S1603. To move.

In step S1602, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the movable effect members 17A to 17C, which are executed in response to the power-on, are in the initial operation period of the accessory.
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the soft volume value cannot be adjusted by using the cross key 6f during the initial operation period of the accessory in which the movable effect members 17A to 17C are performing the initial operation. ..
That is, when it is determined that the movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the initial operation period of the accessory (step S1602; No), the control CPU 141 ends the soft volume adjustment process.
When it is determined that it is not the initial operation period of the accessory of the movable effect members 17A to 17C (step S1602; No), the process is transferred to step S1607.

When it is determined in step S1601 that the state is not the state when the power is turned on (step S1601; No), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1603 whether or not the game machine 1 is currently in an error (an error is occurring).
This is determined by whether or not an error detection signal is received from the effect control board 130.
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player cannot adjust the soft volume value using the cross key 6f while the game machine 1 is in an error and an error sound is output. ing.
That is, when the control CPU 141 determines that the game machine 1 is in an error (an error is occurring) (step S1603; Yes), the software volume adjustment process is terminated as it is.
Even if the game machine 1 is in the process of making an error (even if the error sound is being output), the hard volume value can be changed by using the volume changeover switch 22.
After the error is cleared, the effect sound is output with the master volume value based on the changed hard volume value.
When it is determined that the game machine 1 is not in an error (step S1603; No), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1604 whether or not the current game state is a customer waiting state.

The general CPU 141 indicates that the game state is in the customer waiting state, that the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is not executed even after the symbol confirmation display period (0.5 seconds) of the effect symbol 16a has elapsed. It can be judged from the fact that the jackpot game is not executed.
When it is determined that the customer is not in the waiting state (step S1604; No), the general CPU 141 determines in step S1605 whether or not the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is currently being executed or whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. judge.
When it is determined that neither the variation display of the effect symbol 16a nor the jackpot game is executed (step S1605; No), the control CPU 141 ends the soft volume adjustment process without performing anything as it is.
When it is determined that the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed (step S1605; Yes), the control CPU 141 shifts the process to step S1622.

When it is determined in step S1604 that the customer is waiting (step S1604; Yes), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1606 whether or not the menu screen 50 is being displayed.
If it is determined that the menu screen 50 is being displayed (step S1606; Yes), the control CPU 141 ends the soft volume adjustment process without performing anything as it is.
If it is determined that the menu screen 50 is not being displayed (step S1606; No), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1607 whether or not the volume adjustment screen 61 is being displayed.

When it is determined in step S1607 that the volume adjustment screen 61 is not being displayed (step S1607; No), the control CPU 141 presses the up key (volume up button) or down key (volume down button) of the cross key 6f in step S1620. Determine if it has been manipulated.

When it is determined in step S1620 that neither the up key nor the down key is operated (step S1620; No), the soft volume adjustment process is terminated without performing anything as it is, and either the up key or the down key is operated. If it is determined that this has been done (step S1620; Yes), in step S1621, the control CPU 141 transmits an output command to the voice control circuit 300 to pronounce the current volume confirmation sound corresponding to the current master volume value at that volume. The soft volume adjustment process ends.

When it is determined in step S1607 that the volume adjustment screen 61 is being displayed (step S1607; Yes), the control CPU 141 uses the up key (volume up button) or down key (volume down button) of the cross key 6f in step S1608. Determines if has been manipulated.

When it is determined in step S1608 that neither the up key nor the down key has been operated (step S1608; No), the process is transferred to step S1617, and it is determined that either the up key or the down key has been operated (step S1608). S1608; Yes), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1609 whether or not the current setting of the volume changeover switch 22 is “eco”.
If it is determined to be "eco" (step S1609; Yes), the adjustment of the master volume value itself is not permitted, so that the soft volume adjustment process ends without doing anything.
In the case of the volume changeover switch 22 by the rotary switch, it is determined whether or not the adjustment mode enables the volume / light amount adjustment regardless of whether the "eco" mode is on or off.

If it is determined in step S1609 that it is not "eco" (step S1609; No), or if the adjustment mode is such that the volume can be adjusted, the control CPU 141 determines in step S1610 which of the up key and the down key of the cross key 6f is. It is determined whether the operation has been performed (which key input signal has been transmitted from the effect control board 130).
When it is determined that the upper key has been operated (step S1610; Yes), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1611 whether or not the current master volume value is the upper limit value, that is, the maximum volume value “10). In the case of the volume changeover switch 22 by the rotary switch, the upper limit value is "5".

When it is determined in step S1611 that the current volume value is not the upper limit value (step S1611; No), the control CPU 141 increases the master volume value by one point in step S1612, and increases the master volume value after the increase in step S1613. An output command for producing a confirmation sound corresponding to the above volume is transmitted to the voice control circuit 300, and the master volume adjustment process is completed.
In this case, the VDP 200 is controlled to display the volume gauge 62 in accordance with the changed master volume value on the image display device 16.
When it is determined that the current volume value is the upper limit value (step S1611; Yes), it is considered impossible to increase the volume any more, and the soft volume adjustment process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1610 that the up key has not been operated (step S1610; No), it is determined that the down key has been operated.
In this case, in step S1614, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the current master volume value is the lower limit value, that is, the minimum volume value “1”.
When it is determined that the current volume value is not the lower limit value (step S1614; No), the control CPU 141 lowers the master volume value by one point in step S1615, and corresponds to the downed master volume value in step S1616. An output command for sounding the confirmation sound at that volume is transmitted to the voice control circuit 300, and the master volume adjustment process is completed.
In this case, the VDP 200 is controlled to display the volume gauge 62 in accordance with the adjusted master volume value on the image display device 16.
When it is determined that the current volume value is the lower limit value (step S1614; Yes), it is considered impossible to further reduce the volume, and the soft volume adjustment process is terminated.
In the case of the volume changeover switch 22 by the rotary switch, if the adjustment mode is "1", the lower limit value is "0".

If it is determined in step S1608 that none of the up and down keys has been operated (step S1608; No), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1617 whether or not the up and down keys have not been operated for a predetermined time.
When it is determined that the up / down keys have not been operated for a predetermined time (step S1617; Yes), the control CPU 141 determines in step S1618 whether or not the hard volume value and the master volume value have a predetermined relationship.
When it is determined that the relationship is determined (step S1618; Yes), the control CPU 141 resets the master volume value to the hard volume value in step S1619.

The predetermined relationship is as follows, and the volume (master volume value) is reset (reset) to the hard volume value by satisfying any of the relationships (1), (2), and (3).
(1) When the relationship of hard volume value> adjusted master volume value (soft volume value) is satisfied (2) hard volume value <adjusted master volume value (soft volume value)
However, even if the cross key 6f is not operated continuously for a predetermined period in the customer waiting state, the master volume value may not be reset.
In this case, the processes of steps S1617 to S1619 are skipped.

When it is determined in step S1604 that the customer is in the waiting state (step S1604; Yes), the processing of step S1607 and step S1607 is skipped, and either the up key or the down key of step S1608 is not operated. (Step S1608; No), the processing after step S1617 may be performed.
That is, regardless of whether the menu screen or the volume adjustment screen is displayed in the customer waiting state, if the cross key 6f is not operated continuously for a predetermined period, the volume (master volume value) is set to the hard volume value. Reset to.

Further, when it is determined in step S1605 that the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed (step S1605; Yes), which of the up key and the down key is operated in step S1622? Judge whether or not.

When it is determined in step S1622 that neither the up key nor the down key is operated (step S1622; No), the soft volume adjustment process is terminated without performing anything as it is, and either the up key or the down key is operated. When it is determined that this has been done (step S1622; Yes), in step S1623, the control CPU 141 sends an output command to the voice control circuit 300 to output the voice being output at a volume corresponding to the changed master volume value, and the master End the volume adjustment process.
In this case, the VDP 200 is controlled to display the volume gauge 62 according to the changed master volume value on the image display device 16.
The soft volume adjustment process of FIG. 60 may be performed by the effect control board 130 (sub CPU 130a).

In this way, after the end of the initial operation period of the accessory of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, which is executed in response to the power-on of the game machine 1, or in the customer waiting state, the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed. When either the key or the down key is operated, the current volume confirmation sound is output at the volume corresponding to the current master volume value, and when either the up key or the down key is operated again, the changed A volume change confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the master volume value.
In the present embodiment, as described above, the volume of the error sound cannot be adjusted (cannot be changed) by operating either the up key or the down key.

On the other hand, the up key is available regardless of whether the volume adjustment screen 61 is not displayed or the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a or the execution of the jackpot game. When either the or down key is operated, the volume of the sound being output is changed, and the current volume confirmation sound and volume change confirmation sound are not output.

(Voice output processing by voice control circuit)
Next, the voice output processing by the voice control circuit 300 will be described based on the control by the control CPU 141.
As described above, the voice control circuit 300 includes a fixed channel used for outputting an error sound and a variable channel used for outputting an effect sound.
That is, among the audio information, the audio based on the specific audio information (error sound / effect sound) is output using the specific audio channel (fixed channel / variable channel) among the plurality of audio channels.

If the command input from the control CPU 141 is the "effect sound output command", the voice control unit 301 inputs the effect sound data specified by the "effect sound output command" to the designated variable channel.
Then, the voice control unit 301 gives a decoding unit control command and a volume control command to the decoding unit 310 and the channel volume control unit 311 in the designated voice channel, respectively.
If the input command is an "error sound output command", control is performed so that the error sound data according to the error content is input to the voice channel specified there.

The decoding unit 310 that has received the decoding unit control command performs processing according to the command, for example, playback start processing, playback pause processing, and playback end processing.
In the case of the reproduction start processing, the audio data corresponding to the sound number included in the decoding unit control command is read from the sound source ROM 400 and the decompression processing is performed.
The decompressed audio data is sent to the channel volume control unit 311. If the audio data stored in the sound source ROM 400 is not compressed, the decompression process is not performed.

The channel volume control unit 311 that has received the volume control command performs processing according to the volume control command.
For example, when playback starts, it is controlled to output at the specified volume (%), and when a fade-in timer is specified, the fade-in time specified by the fade-in timer is set. Control is performed to gradually increase the volume from the start of playback so that the specified volume is reached after the lapse of time.
When playback is stopped, the volume is set to "0", and when a fade-out timer is specified, the specified volume is "0" after the fade-in time specified by the fade-in timer has elapsed. The volume is gradually lowered from the start of playback so as to reach.
For example, when the effect sound output command input from the control CPU 141 to the voice control unit 301 is "playback of BGM (stereo) with sound number 11 at a final volume of 90% and a fade timer of 0.1 seconds". Will be described.

The voice control unit 301 refers to the effect sound output command (refers to the current status indicated by all audio channel status information), and the currently unused (standby) audio channel ch6 specified by the effect sound command. , 7 commands the decoding units 310-6, 310-7 and the channel volume control units 311-6, 311-7 of each audio channel ch6, 7 to start the reproduction of the specified audio (sound number 11). give.

This decoding unit control command is sent to the decoding units 301-6 and 310-7 that have received it.
Further, the voice control unit 301 sends a volume control command including a volume instruction so that the volume finally becomes 90% in 0.1 seconds of the fade-in timer to the channel volume control unit 310.
Upon receiving the volume control command, the channel volume control unit 311 prepares the audio signal input from the decoding units 311-6 and 311-7 as an audio signal that becomes 90% volume over 0.1 seconds. Output to.

When the "directing sound stop command" is received from the general CPU 141, the voice control unit 301 refers to the status information of all the voice channels and identifies the voice channel that outputs the voice of the sound number.
Then, in order to stop the audio during playback of the audio channel, a decoding unit control command including a playback stop instruction is sent to the decoding unit 310.
Upon receiving such a control command for the decoding unit, the decoding unit 310 of the audio channel stops the decompression processing of the compressed data and stops the supply of the audio data to the channel volume control unit 311.
The audio channel for which the stop sound number is being output may be specified in the "effect sound stop command" output by the general CPU 141.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a voice output process by the voice control circuit 300 according to the present embodiment in detail.
As described above, the voice output processing in the voice control circuit 300 is controlled by the voice control unit 301 included in the voice control circuit 300.
The voice output processing by the voice control circuit 300 will be described in the form of a flowchart, but it is actually realized by hardware logic.

In step S2001, the voice control unit 301 determines whether or not an error sound output command has been received from the control CPU 141.
In the error sound output command, the sound number of the error sound to be output, the audio channel to be output, and the volume value (maximum volume value) are specified.
When it is determined that the error sound output command has been received (step S2001; Yes), the voice control unit 301 reads the error sound data of the sound number specified by the error sound output command from the sound source ROM 400 in step S2002, and steps. In S2003, the read error sound data and the volume value (maximum volume value) are input to the audio channel specified by the error sound output command.

Specifically, the error sound data is input to the voice channel decoding unit 310, and the volume value is input to the channel volume control unit 311.
For an error sound having a low priority such as a dish full tank notification, a volume value corresponding to the current master volume value may be input to the voice channel instead of the maximum volume value.

When it is determined that the error sound output command has not been received (step S2001; No), the voice control unit 301 determines in step S2004 whether or not the effect sound output command has been received.
The effect sound output command includes the sound number, volume, audio channel, and presence / absence of fade (fade in, fade out) of the effect sound to be output.
When it is determined that the effect sound output command has been received in step S2004 (step S2004; Yes), the voice control unit 301 reads the effect sound data of the specified sound number from the sound source ROM 400 in step S2005.

Next, in step S2006, the voice control unit 301 inputs the read production sound data and the volume value to the voice channel designated by the production sound output command.
Specifically, the effect sound data specified by the effect sound output command is input to the audio channel decoding unit 310, and the volume value specified by the effect sound output command is input to the channel volume control unit 311.
As described above, the volume value specified by the effect sound output command is a value based on the master volume value confirmed in step S1303 of FIG. 54.

If it is determined in step S2004 that the effect sound output command has not been received (step S2004; No), the voice control unit 301 determines in step S2007 whether or not the error sound stop command has been received.
The error sound stop command includes the sound number of the error sound to be stopped and the voice channel.
If it is determined in step S2007 that the error sound stop command has been received (step S2007; Yes), the voice control unit 301 stops the error sound being output on the designated channel in step S2008.

When it is determined in step S2007 that the error sound stop command has not been received (step S2007; No), the voice control unit 301 determines whether or not the effect sound stop command has been received in step S2009. The effect sound stop command includes a sound number to be stopped.
When it is determined in step S2009 that the effect sound stop command has been received (step S2009; Yes), the voice control unit 301 controls the voice channel playing the voice of the designated sound number in step S2010 to control the voice channel. Stop the output of the production sound.

When the voice control unit 301 determines in step S2009 that the effect sound stop command has not been received (step S2009; No), in step S2011, the volume value is regenerated (output in step S1403 and step S1405 in FIG. 55). Determine if a setting command has been received. As described with reference to FIG. 55, receiving the volume value reset command means that the master volume value has been changed.
When it is determined in step S2011 that the volume value reset command has been received (step S2011; Yes), the voice control unit 301 uses the volume value reset command for the voice channel specified by the volume value reset command in step S2012. Enter the new volume value specified to change the volume.

If it is determined in step S2011 that the volume value reset command has not been received (step S2011; No), the voice control unit 301 determines in step S2013 whether or not the effect sound pause command has been received. The effect sound pause command includes the sound number of the effect sound for which playback should be paused.
When it is determined in step S2013 that the effect sound pause command has been received (step S2013; Yes), the voice control unit 301 controls the sound channel playing the designated sound number in step S2014 to produce the effect sound. Pauses the output of.
In the "effect sound pause command", the audio channel that outputs the effect sound to be paused may be specified.

(Transition of output volume when changing volume)
The output volume (sound pressure) (decibel (dB)) output from the audio output device 9 is calculated based on WAV data × channel volume value × master volume value.
Adjustments are made to raise the volume (raise the master volume value) by operating the up key on the cross key 6f, and the output level changes in stages from volume "1" to volume "10". When the output volume is gradually increased from "1" to "10", the increase in the output volume on the voice control and the increase in the output volume perceived by the player are different.

As shown in FIG. 62 (1), the output volume (sound source sound pressure level) for voice control is designed to increase linearly as the output level increases, while FIG. 62 (1) As shown in 2), the output volume (output sound pressure level) that the player perceives audibly increases from the output level "1" to the output level "5", and the output level is "6". When it becomes, it changes to draw a proportional curve that rises at a stretch.
Therefore, when the volume is adjusted by operating the up key of the cross key 6f, the output volume perceived by the player audibly increases as the output level is increased up to the output level "6". When the output level reaches "6", it increases sharply.

In the example of FIG. 62 (2), it was explained that the output volume perceived by the player at the time of the output level “6” corresponding to the volume “6” is suddenly increased, but it corresponds to the volume “2”. An audio output device may be used that outputs so that the output volume perceived by the player when the output level is “2” is increased at once.
As shown in FIG. 63 (1), the output volume (sound source sound pressure level) on the voice control increases at a stretch up to the output level "2", and increases from the output level "3" to the output level "10". The rise width up to is designed to rise more slowly than the rise width up to the output level "2", and as shown in FIG. 63 (2), the output volume (output sound) heard by the player is felt. The pressure level) increases at once from the output level "3" to the output level "10" according to the design of the output volume on the voice control, and draws an inverse proportional curve that gradually increases. To change to.
Therefore, when the volume is adjusted by operating the up key of the cross key 6f, the output volume that the player hears increases at once up to the output level "2", and gradually increases after the output level "3". Become.

(Light intensity adjustment processing)
In the examples of FIGS. 56, 57, and 58 described above, the up / down key operation of the cross key 6f is performed during the customer waiting state, the variable display of the effect symbol 16a (excluding the symbol confirmation display period), and the jackpot game. Although the volume adjustment has been explained, various lighting devices (for the panel) by operating the left and right keys of the cross key 6f during the waiting state for customers, the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a (excluding the symbol confirmation display period), and the execution of the jackpot game. It is also possible to adjust the amount of light of the lighting device 18 and the frame lighting device 27).
Further, even after the end of the initial operation period of the accessory of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, which is executed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right keys of the cross key 6f. That is, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are set to a common adjustable period.

When waiting for customers, either the left key (light intensity up button) or the right key (light intensity decrease button) is operated while the menu screen 50 is not displayed and the light intensity adjustment screen 71 is not displayed. Then, the light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed, and the light amount adjustment confirmation sound (sound of "pin ♪") is output. On the light amount adjustment screen 71, a light amount gauge 72 indicating the currently set light amount is displayed.

When either the left key or the right key is operated while the light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed, the light amount gauge 72 indicating the changed light amount is displayed, and the sound of the light amount adjustment confirmation sound is different. The sound (the sound of the bell "Charin ♪") is output.
If the cross key 6f is not operated for 120 seconds after receiving the customer waiting command, the light intensity is reset to the initial light intensity (for example, the light intensity “5”).

The light intensity can be changed within a predetermined light intensity change range, and cannot be changed to a light intensity larger than the preset MAX light intensity (upper limit value), and is smaller than the predetermined MIN light intensity (lower limit value). It is not possible to change the amount of light to a smaller amount.

In this way, in the customer waiting state, if the left and right keys are operated while the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not displayed, the light amount is not changed and the light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed to display the currently set light amount. Since the light amount gauge 72 is displayed and the current light amount confirmation sound is output, the player changes the light amount while grasping the currently set light amount when adjusting the light amount in the waiting state for customers. It is possible to easily and surely adjust the amount of light to a desired value.
When adjusting the volume while the volume adjustment screen 61 is displayed in the waiting state for customers, the volume change confirmation sound is output when the up and down keys are operated, while the light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed. When adjusting the light intensity in the absence state, the light intensity change confirmation sound may not be output even if the left and right keys are operated.

During the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a or the execution of the jackpot game, if any of the left and right keys is operated while the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not displayed, various lighting devices (lighting for the panel) that are emitting light are emitted. The device 18 and the frame lighting device 27) continuously emit light with the changed light amount, and the current light amount confirmation sound and the light amount change confirmation sound are not output.
If the current light amount confirmation sound and the light amount change confirmation sound are output during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol 16a or the execution of the jackpot game, the sound being output (BGM for variation effect, BGM for jackpot game, effect sound) It is possible to surely avoid the inconvenience that the effect of the sound effect by the sound being output is reduced due to the confusion between the sound and the sound of the confirmation sound.

Further, during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a or the execution of the jackpot game, if any of the left and right keys is operated while the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not displayed, the display size in the customer waiting state is displayed. The light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed near the right end of the display unit, which has a smaller visible display size and does not overlap with the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, and the light amount gauge 72 is displayed with the changed light amount. It is possible to make the person surely recognize that the light amount has been changed and that the effect symbol 16a has been variablely displayed.

In addition, a special production image (for example, battle production, mission production, etc.) performed in the SP reach production or SPSP reach production is being displayed, a development notification image (for example, "super reach !!" is displayed) is being displayed, or Even during the display of a specific effect image such as an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect button 6a, the light amount adjustment screen 71 has a visible display size smaller than the display size in the waiting state and the effect image (moving image). Is displayed in a position that does not overlap with.

The light amount adjusting screen 71 may be displayed at a position overlapping a part or all of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a.
In this case, the light amount adjustment screen 61 is displayed on a layer higher than the variable display of the effect symbol 16a. In that case, it is desirable that the light amount adjusting screen 71 is represented by an image having a transmittance that does not make it difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the effect symbol 16a. By doing so, it is possible to recognize the light amount adjustment screen 71 and also to recognize the effect display located below the light amount adjustment screen 71, and it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding of the game result of the player and to obtain an appropriate amount of light. An adjustment function can be provided. In addition, while displaying a special production image (for example, battle production, mission production, etc.) performed by reach production, SP reach production, or SPSP reach production, and displaying a development notification image (for example, "Super Reach !!" is displayed). Alternatively, the same applies to the display of a specific effect image such as an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect button 6a.

While the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is being executed, if any of the left and right keys is operated while the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not displayed, the current light amount confirmation sound and the light amount change confirmation sound are output. It may be. In this case, both the variable effect BGM and the confirmation sound are output from the audio output device 9.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating the light amount adjustment process by the effect control board 130.
In step S1701, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the power of the game machine 1 is in the state at the time of power-on.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that it is in the power-on state (step S1701; Yes), the process shifts to step S1702, and when it is determined that it is not in the power-on state (step S1701; No), the process proceeds to step S1703. To move.

In step S1702, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the movable effect members 17A to 17C, which are executed in response to the power-on, are in the initial operation period of the accessory.
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the light amount cannot be adjusted by using the cross key 6f during the initial operation period of the accessory in which the movable effect members 17A to 17C are performing the initial operation.
That is, when the sub CPU 130a determines that the movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the initial operation period of the accessory (step S1702; Yes), the sub CPU 130a ends the light amount adjusting process.
When it is determined that it is not the initial operation period of the accessory of the movable effect members 17A to 17C (step S1702; No), the process is transferred to step S1707.

When it is determined in step S1701 that the state is not the state when the power is turned on (step S1701; No), the sub CPU 130a determines in step S1703 whether or not the game machine 1 is currently in an error (error is occurring).
This is determined by whether or not an error detection signal is received from the main control board 110.
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the light amount cannot be adjusted using the cross key 6f while the game machine 1 is in an error and an error sound is output.
That is, when the sub CPU 130a determines that the game machine 1 is in an error (an error is occurring) (step S1703; Yes), the sub CPU 130a ends the light amount adjusting process as it is.
When it is determined in step S1703 that the game machine 1 is not in an error (step S1703; No), the sub CPU 130a determines in step S1704 whether or not the current game state is a customer waiting state.

The sub CPU 130a indicates that the game state is in the customer waiting state even if the effect symbol 16a (determination symbol indicating the result of the jackpot determination) is confirmed and stopped and a predetermined time elapses (0.5 seconds) after the effect symbol 16a is displayed. It can be judged from the fact that the variable display of is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed.
When it is determined that the customer is not in the waiting state (step S1704; No), the sub CPU 130a is currently executing the variable display of the effect symbol 16a in the effect symbol 16a in step S1705, or is executing the jackpot game. Judge whether or not.
When it is determined that neither the variation display nor the jackpot game is executed in the effect symbol 16a (step S1705; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the light amount adjusting process without performing anything as it is.
When it is determined that the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed (step S1705; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1719.

When it is determined in step S1704 that the customer is waiting (step S1704; Yes), the sub CPU 130a determines in step S1706 whether or not the menu screen 50 is being displayed.
When it is determined that the menu screen 50 is being displayed (step S1706; Yes), the sub CPU 130a ends the light amount adjustment process without performing anything as it is.
When it is determined that the menu screen 50 is not being displayed (step S1706; No), the sub CPU 130a determines in step S1707 whether or not the light amount adjustment screen 71 is being displayed.

When it is determined in step S1707 that the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not being displayed (step S1707; No), the sub CPU 130a has the left key (light amount up button) or the right key (light amount down button) of the cross key 6f in step S1717. Determine if it has been manipulated.

When it is determined in step S1717 that neither the left key nor the right key is operated (step S1717; No), the light intensity adjustment process is terminated without performing anything as it is, and either the left key or the right key is operated. If it is determined that the light intensity has been adjusted (step S1717; Yes), a light intensity adjustment designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 150 to end the light intensity adjustment process.

When it is determined in step S1707 that the light amount adjustment screen 71 is being displayed (step S1707; Yes), the sub CPU 130a determines in step S1708 that the left key (light amount up button) or the right key (light amount down button) of the cross key 6f Determines if has been manipulated.

When it is determined in step S1708 that neither the left key nor the right key is operated (step S1708; No), the light intensity adjustment process ends.
When it is determined in step S1708 that either the left key or the right key has been operated (step S1708; Yes), the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current volume changeover switch 22 setting is "eco" in step S1709. To judge.
If it is determined to be "eco" (step S1709; Yes), the light intensity adjustment process is terminated.
In the case of the volume changeover switch 22 by the rotary switch, it is determined whether or not the adjustment mode enables the volume / light amount adjustment regardless of whether the "eco" mode is on or off.

If it is determined in step S1709 that it is not "eco" (step S1709; No), or if the adjustment mode is such that the volume and light intensity can be adjusted, the control CPU 141 determines in step S1710 that the left and right keys of the cross key 6f It is determined which is operated (which key input signal is transmitted from the effect control board 130).
When it is determined that the left key has been operated (step S1710; Yes), the sub CPU 130a determines in step S1711 whether or not the current light intensity is the upper limit value, that is, the maximum light intensity “10”). In the case of the volume changeover switch 22 by the rotary switch, the upper limit value is "5".

When it is determined in step S1711 that the current light intensity is not the upper limit value (step S1711; No), the sub CPU 130a increases the light intensity value by one point in step S1712, and specifies the increased light intensity value in step S1713. A light amount change designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 150 to end the light amount adjustment process.
When it is determined in step S1711 that the current light intensity is the upper limit value (step S1711; Yes), it is considered impossible to further increase the light intensity, and the light intensity adjustment process is terminated without performing anything as it is.

When it is determined in step S1710 that the left key is not operated (step S1710; No), it is determined that the right key is operated.
In this case, in step S1714, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current light intensity is the lower limit value, that is, the minimum light intensity value “1”.
When it is determined that the current light amount is not the lower limit value (step S1714; No), the sub CPU 130a reduces the light amount value by one point in step S1715, and in step S1716, specifies the light amount change to specify the light amount value after the down. A command is transmitted to the lamp control board 150 to end the light intensity adjustment process.
When it is determined that the current light intensity is the lower limit value (step S1714; Yes), it is considered impossible to further reduce the light intensity value, and the light intensity adjustment process is terminated without performing anything as it is.
In the case of the volume changeover switch 22 by the rotary switch, if the adjustment mode is "1", the lower limit value is "0".

If it is determined in step S1708 that neither the left key nor the right key has been operated (step S1708; No), the light amount adjustment process ends without performing anything as it is.

Further, when it is determined in step S1705 that the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed (step S1705; Yes), the sub CPU 130a is operated by either the left key or the right key in step S1719. Determine if it has been done.

When the sub CPU 130a determines in step S1719 that neither the left key nor the right key is operated (step S1719; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the light intensity adjustment process without performing anything as it is, and either the left key or the right key When it is determined that the light intensity has been operated (step S1719; Yes), in step S1720, a light intensity change designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 150 to end the light intensity adjustment process.

In this way, after the end of the initial operation period of the accessory of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, which is executed in response to the power-on of the game machine 1, or in the customer waiting state, the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not displayed. When either the left key or the right key of the key 6f is operated, the amount of light is not changed, and when either the left key or the right key is operated again, various lighting devices emit light with the changed amount of light. ..

Further, after the end of the initial operation period of the accessory of the movable effect members 17A to 17C or in the customer waiting state, the light amount is operated by operating either the left key or the right key of the cross key 6f while the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not displayed. When the adjustment screen 71 is displayed, the light amount gauge 72 indicating the current light amount is displayed, and the current light amount confirmation sound is output. When either the left key or the right key is operated again, the light amount gauge 72 is displayed. Is displayed with the changed light intensity, and a light intensity change confirmation sound is output.

On the other hand, the left key is used regardless of whether the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not displayed or the light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a or the execution of the jackpot game. When either the or right key is operated, the amount of light being emitted is changed. In this case, the current light intensity confirmation sound and the light intensity change confirmation sound are not output.

In the above description, in the customer waiting state, the light amount adjustment is executed with the output of the light amount change confirmation sound when either the left key or the right key is operated, but the light amount change confirmation sound is executed. It may be executed without the output of.
That is, when either the left key or the right key is operated, the light amount gauge 72 is displayed with the changed light amount, but the light amount change confirmation sound is not output.

(Lamp CPU main processing)
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the lamp control board 150.
When power is supplied to the lamp control board 150 by the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the lamp CPU 150a, and the lamp CPU 150a performs the following main processing.
The lamp CPU 150 performs the initialization process in step S3000, then the abnormality determination process in step S3001, the accessory effect execution determination process in step S3002, the accessory effect effect process in step S3003, the light emission effect process in step S3004, and step S3005. In, the button effect processing is sequentially performed. After that, the processes of steps S3001 to S3005 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt is generated.

In the abnormality determination process of step S3001, it is determined whether or not various error detection signals have been input from the main control board 110 (whether or not an error has occurred), and when it is determined that the error detection signals have been input, The error flag is set to "ON".

(Initialization process)
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an initialization process by the lamp control board 150.
The lamp CPU 150a performs an initialization process when the power is turned on. In this process, the lamp CPU 150a sequentially performs the accessory initial operation process in step S3010, the light emission initial operation process in step S3011, and the effect button initial operation process in step S3012, and then initializes to the effect control board 130 in step S3013. Send a signal.

(Initial operation processing of the character)
FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating the initial operation processing of the accessory by the lamp control board 150.
First, in step S3020, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation timer is counting.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the initial operation timer is counting (step S3020; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a shifts the process to step S3023.

If the lamp CPU 150a determines in step S3020 that the initial operation timer is not counting (step S3020; No), the lamp CPU 150a starts the countdown of the initial operation timer in step S3021. The initial operation timer is set to, for example, 120 seconds.
Next, in step S3022, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation prohibition flag of the movable effect members 17A to 17C to "ON".

In step S3023, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the standby positions, respectively.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that each of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is in the standby position (step S3020; Yes), the process shifts to step S3025, and the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17A to When it is determined that any of 17C is not in the standby position (step S3023; No), the process is transferred to step S3024.

In step S3024, the lamp CPU 150a performs a return operation process. In this process, for example, when the first movable effect member 17a is not in the standby position, that is, when the blade portion 17a2 is not housed in the sheath portion 17a1, the lamp CPU 150a causes the blade portion 17a2 to be housed in the sheath portion 17a1. The blade portion 17a2 is returned to the operation.

In step S3025, the lamp CPU 150a sets a predetermined initial operation pattern in order to initially operate the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, respectively. The initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.
Next, in step S3026, the lamp CPU 150a starts the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C according to the initial operation pattern set in step S3025 (start of driving the stepping motor).

Next, in step S3027, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed. In this process, it is determined whether or not all the initial operations related to the initial operation pattern are completed based on the timer counter that measures the initial operation period (for example, 30 seconds) of the accessory determined in advance based on the initial operation pattern. ..
The initial operation period of the accessory is the initial operation after the initial operation of any of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the initial operation pattern according to the power of the game machine 1 being turned on. All the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the pattern are performed, and the return operation to the standby position of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C which have performed all the initial operations is completed. It is the operating time of the accessory until it is done.

In step S3027, when the lamp CPU 150a determines that the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C have not been completed (step S3027; No), until the initial operations are completed (the initial operation period of the accessory). When it is determined that the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed by repeating the process of step S3027 (step S3027; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a is initially set in step S3028. It is determined whether or not the count value of the operation timer is "0".

In step S3028, when the lamp CPU 150a determines that the count value of the initial operation timer is not "0" (step S3028; No), the lamp CPU 150a performs the process of step S3028 until the count value of the initial operation timer becomes "0". When it is repeated and it is determined that the count value of the initial operation timer is "0" (step S2038; Yes), in step S2039, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation prohibition flag to "OFF" and initially sets the effect operation prohibition flag. End the operation process.

(Characteristic production execution judgment processing)
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating the accessory effect execution determination process by the lamp control board 150.
First, in step S3030, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect operation permission flag is “ON” in the flag storage area.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect operation permission flag is "ON" (step S3030; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect execution determination process, and determines that the effect operation permission flag is not "ON" (step S3030). ; No), the process is transferred to step S3031. , The effect operation permission flag is a state in which the effect operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C can be executed on the precondition that the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C have been completed. It shows that.
In step S3031, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect execution operation flag is “ON” in the flag storage area.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect operation executing flag is "ON" (step S3031; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect execution determination process and determines that the effect operation execution flag is not "ON". (Step S3031; No), the process is transferred to step S3032.

In step S3032, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the variation effect accompanied by the effect operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the accessory effect is executed in the variation effect executed based on the variation effect pattern designation command (step S804 in FIG. 40) received from the effect control board 130.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the variation effect without the effect operation is executed (step S3032; No), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect execution determination process and determines that the variation effect accompanied by the effect operation is executed. (Step S3032; Yes), the process is transferred to step S3033.

In step S3033, the lamp CPU 150a sets an effect operation pattern for the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform the effect operation in the variable effect to be executed. In this case, one effect operation pattern is set from a plurality of types of effect operation patterns based on the effect content (presence / absence and type of reach, presence / absence and type of advance notice effect, etc.) of the variable effect to be executed. For each of the plurality of effect operation patterns, the type of the movable effect member, the content and operation time of the effect operation, the effect operation execution timing, and the like are defined in advance.
Next, in step S3034, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation permission flag to “ON” in the flag storage area, and ends the accessory effect effect execution determination process.

(Character production processing)
FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating the accessory effect processing by the lamp control board 150.
In step S3040, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the error flag is set to "ON" in the flag storage area in the abnormality determination process of step S3001 of FIG. 65.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the error flag is "ON" in the flag storage area, that is, an error has occurred (step S3040; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect processing without performing anything as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error flag is not "ON" (step S3040; No), the process is transferred to step S3041.

In step S3041, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect operation permission flag is “ON” in the flag storage area.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect operation permission flag is not "ON" (step S3041; No), the lamp CPU 150a shifts the process to step S3042.
In step S3042, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect execution operation flag is “ON” in the flag storage area. The effect operation executing flag indicates that the effect operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the effect operation pattern.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect execution operation flag is "ON" (step S3042; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a shifts the process to step S3047 and determines that the effect operation execution flag is not "ON" (step S3042). ; No), the character production process is completed.

When it is determined in step S3041 that the effect operation permission flag is "ON" (step S3041; Yes), the process is transferred to step S3043, and in step S3043, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not it is the effect operation execution timing. .. As a predetermined effect operation execution timing corresponding to the effect content of the variable effect to be executed, for example, a timing after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a (for example, After the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is started, a special effect image (for example, the timing at which a battle effect or a mission effect is displayed), a timing at which the notice effect image is displayed, and a development notification image (for example, "Super Reach! ”) Is displayed, etc.), timing linked to the operation of the effect button 6a in the button operation effect, and the like.

When the lamp CPU 150a determines that it is not the effect operation execution timing (step S3043; No), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect process and determines that it is the effect operation execution timing (step S3043; Yes), the process is performed in step S3044. Move.
In step S3044, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation executing flag to “ON” in the flag storage area, and then in step S3045, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation permission flag to “OFF”.

Next, in step S3046, the lamp CPU 150a starts the effect operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C according to the effect operation pattern set in step S3034 of the accessory effect effect execution determination process of FIG. , Operate the stepping motor of the panel drive device 17.
Next, in step S3047, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all the effect operations related to the effect operation pattern have been completed.
When it is determined that the effect operation pattern is not completed (step S3047; No), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect process and determines that the effect operation pattern is completed (step S3047; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a Set the effect operation executing flag to "OFF" in step S3048, and ends the accessory effect processing.

(First Embodiment)
(Outline of initial operation pattern and effect operation pattern of movable effect member)
The operation modes of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are roughly classified into the above-mentioned initial operation and effect operation.
The initial operation is an operation mode for confirming the effect operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C executed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, and the first to third movable effects are performed by the stepping motor. In order to control the effect operation of the members 17A to 17C, the position information for confirming whether or not the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are at the origin position is confirmed, and the stepping motor is operated to operate the first stepping motor. It is executed for the purpose of confirming whether or not the detection sensor is normally turned ON / OFF by operating the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C respectively.
On the other hand, the effect operation is a variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect and on the premise that the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C according to the initial operation pattern have been executed and completed. It is executed for the purpose of exerting the effect of the accessory effect of operating / stopping the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C in conjunction with the stop display.

The initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are executed according to a predetermined initial operation pattern. In this initial operation, depending on the current positions of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C at the start of the initial operation, that is, whether or not the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the standby position. Different actions are performed depending on.

When the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the standby positions when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed based on a predetermined initial operation pattern. Will be
Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the standby position of the first movable effect member 17A is such that the blade portions 17a2 and 17c2 are located at the upper part of the display unit of the image display device 16 (the upper part of the effect space 15A) and the sheath portions 17a1 and 17c1. It is in a stored state.
The standby position of the second movable effect member 17B is a state in which the upper part of the display unit of the image display device 16 (the upper part of the effect space 15A) is in front of the first movable effect member 17A.
The standby position of the third movable effect member 17C is a state in which the blade portion 17c2 is housed in the sheath portion 17c1 on the outside of the right outer edge of the display unit of the image display device 16 (the right portion of the effect space 15A).

As shown in FIG. 70 (1), the initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are predetermined as initial operation 1 → initial operation 2 → initial operation 3 → initial operation 4 → initial operation 5. It is stipulated to confirm the effect operation to be executed during the variable effect in the order shown.
The initial operation 1 is an operation mode in which the first movable effect member 17A confirms the operation of the blade portion 17a2 housed in the sheath portion 17a1 moving to the left from the standby position (see FIG. 73 (2)).
The initial operation 2 is an operation mode for confirming an operation in which the third movable effect member 17C moves upward from the standby position to the blade portion 17c2 housed in the sheath portion 17c1 (see FIG. 73 (4)).
The initial operation 3 is an operation mode for confirming an operation in which the second movable effect member 17B moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the central region of the display unit of the image display device 16 (see FIG. 73 (6)).
The initial operation 4 is an operation mode for confirming the operation of the third movable effect member 17C in which the blade portion 17c2 is pulled out from the sheath portion 17c1 from the standby position and tilted on the front side of the display unit of the image display device 16 (FIG. 73 (FIG. 73). 8)).
The initial operation 5 is an operation mode for confirming that each of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C performs the initial operation 1, the initial operation 2, and the initial operation 3 all at once from the standby position (FIG. 73 (10). )reference).

"Initial operation 1" corresponds to "effect operation 1" executed in the variable effect, "initial operation 2" corresponds to "effect operation 2" executed in the variable effect, and "initial operation 3" corresponds to. , Corresponds to "effect operation 3" executed in the variable effect, "initial operation 4" corresponds to "effect operation 4" executed in the variable effect, and "initial operation 5" is executed in the variable effect. Corresponds to "Direction operation 5".

As shown in FIG. 70 (2), when the variable effect of the variable effect pattern accompanied by the effect operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is executed, the effect operation 1 is the start of the variable effect (variation display of the effect symbol 16a). (At the start), it is executed when the notice effect or reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is performed, and the effect action 2 and effect action 3 are executed when the notice effect or reach effect is performed. , The effect operation 4 is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect, and the effect operation 5 is executed as a jackpot determination effect.

Here, the "notice effect" is an effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be performed during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a. For example, the three effect symbols 16a are combined in a specific mode (for example, for example). By temporarily stopping in the combination display mode "246" (pseudo-ream chance eye), which is not the combination display mode of reach loss, and by changing the three effect symbols 16a again (pseudo-ream fluctuation), the number of times is pseudo. There is a pseudo-continuous notice effect that makes it appear that the variable display of the pattern is being performed. In this pseudo-continuous notice effect, it is suggested that the jackpot game is more likely to be performed as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation increases.

Further, the "big hit confirmed effect" is before the three effect symbols 16a are confirmed and stopped displayed in the combination display mode indicating the determination result of the big hit (that is, before the determined symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the jackpot symbol). In), it is a jackpot notification effect that definitely notifies the player that it is a jackpot.
When the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the SP reach jackpot is executed, after the start of the variation display of the three effect symbols 16a in FIG. 71 (1), (2) the effect symbol of "2 (dog)" is displayed in the left area. 70a is temporarily stopped, then (3) the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped in the right area, and the left and right effect symbols 70a are in a reach state with the same symbol "2 (dog)". The normal reach production will be performed. It is suggested that during the execution of the normal reach effect, the effect operation 1 by the first movable effect member 17A may be executed to develop into SP or SPSP reach.

Then, the predetermined transition effect SH is performed in FIG. 71 (4), and then (5) the temporarily stopped left and right "2 (dog)" effect symbols 16a move to the display area near the upper left and right ends. Then, the display size is reduced, and only the identification part of "2" is changed to the reduced symbol ZG, and the SP reach is developed.

When the SP reach is developed in FIG. 71 (6), a battle effect is performed as the SP reach effect, and the ally character C2 and the enemy character T start a battle in the display area including the central area. Next, (7) when the ally character C2 makes a punch attack on the enemy character T and hunts down the enemy character T, the jackpot is performed by the effect operation 4 of the (8) third movable effect member 17C via the effect effect. A definite effect is performed, and the effect operation 4 deterministically notifies that the jackpot is a big hit.

When the return of the third movable effect member 17C to the standby position is completed and the jackpot decision effect is completed, (9) a victory confirmation effect (display of the victory image) indicating that the ally character C2 has won the enemy character T is performed. After being broken, (10) temporarily stopped in the combination display mode "222" of the same even-numbered symbol matching indicating a normal jackpot, and then (11) the production symbols of "2 (dog) 2 (dog) 2 (dog)". The fixed stop display of 70a is displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "222" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

The "big hit decision effect" is an effect in which the movable effect member performs an effect operation in response to the operation of the effect button 6a during the determined valid period that occurs during the variable effect to notify that the result is a jackpot determination result. It is a premium production with a high rarity value that has a lower occurrence rate than the above-mentioned jackpot confirmation production.
When the variation effect related to the SPSP reach jackpot variation effect pattern is executed, in FIG. 72 (1), after the start of the variation display of the three effect symbols 16a, (2) the effect of "7 (pig)" in the left area. The symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and then (3) the effect symbol 70a of "7 (pig)" is temporarily stopped in the right area, and the left and right effect symbols 70a are in a reach state with the same symbol "7 (pig)". And the normal reach production is performed. It is suggested that the effect operation 2 by the third movable effect member 17C may be performed during the execution of the normal reach effect to develop into SP or SPSP reach.

Then, the predetermined transition effect SH is performed in FIG. 72 (4), and subsequently, (5) the temporarily stopped left and right “7 (pig)” effect symbols 16a move to the display area near the upper left and right ends. Then, the display size is reduced to the reduced symbol ZG of only the identification portion of "7", and the display is changed to SPSP reach. At this time, it is suggested that the effect operation 3 by the second movable effect member 17B may be performed to perform the SPSP reach with a high expectation of a big hit.

When the SPSP reach is developed in FIG. 72 (6), a battle effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the battle effect in the above-mentioned SP reach effect is performed as the SPSP reach effect, and the ally character C2 and the enemy are performed in the display area including the central area. The battle begins with the character T. After that, (7) the number of ally characters increases by one, and the two ally characters C2 and C3 and the enemy character T battle, and the line "I'm going !!" is displayed and the ally characters C2 and C3. When he is trying to hunt down the enemy character T by using various attack techniques to defeat the enemy character T, (8) predicts that there is a possibility that the decision validity period of the jackpot decision production will occur (expect). ) A sign production is performed.

In the sign effect, a sign image KG consisting of multiple arc-shaped effects gathering toward the center of the central area and a promotion sign display consisting of three dark-colored buttons imitating the effect button is displayed, and the three dark-colored buttons are arc-shaped. Gradually move to the center of the central area along the effect. Then, at the timing before the predetermined time for which the determined valid period is set, the effect button 6a starts to change to the protruding state.

Next, when the change of the effect button 6a to the protruding state is completed in FIG. 72 (9), the determined valid period is set, and the dark color button formed in the center of the central region is bright to imitate the current effect button. Along with changing to a color button, an operation promotion image SG indicating a character image prompting the operation of the effect button of the red display color "Press !!" and a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the effect button is displayed (operation). (Promotion effect), the button light emitting LED lights up, and the effect button 6a emits red light (light emission effect).

Then, when the player presses the effect button 6a in the protruding state or when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, (10) the jackpot determination effect by the effect operation 5 of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed. Will be done. In addition, a rainbow flash is displayed on the entire display unit with the start of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C.

When the return of the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C to the standby position is completed and the jackpot determination production is completed, (11) a victory confirmation production (winning image) indicating that the ally character C2 has won the enemy character T. (12) Temporarily stopped in the combination display mode "777" of the same odd-numbered symbol matching indicating the probability variation jackpot, and then (13) "7 (pig) 7 (pig) 7 (pig) ) ”Is displayed as a fixed stop display, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of“ 777 ”as that of the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.
In this way, since the effect operation 5 is performed as a jackpot determination effect, it is possible to greatly enhance the player's uplifting feeling for the probabilistic jackpot winning by the premium effect operation 5 having a low occurrence rate and a high rare value.
In the case of loss, a failure image suggesting that the image is lost is displayed on the image display device 16 without executing the big hit determination effect by the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C.

It should be noted that the jackpot determination effect may be an effect that is not based on the operation of the effect button 6a. Specifically, in FIG. 72 (7), when a predetermined time elapses after the ally characters C2 and C3 perform various attack techniques for defeating the enemy character T and hunt down the enemy character T, FIG. 72 (10) shows. The effect operation 5 is performed by the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C (big hit determination effect). That is, the sign effect of FIG. 72 (8) and the operation promotion effect of FIG. 72 (9) are not displayed, and the effect button 6a does not change to the protruding state.
There is a possibility that a jackpot decision production will be performed Suddenly a premium production by production operation 5 will be performed without a sign, giving a dramatic impact to the player and climaxing the player's uplifting feeling for the probability change jackpot winning Can be increased up to.

(Initial operation mode and image display mode of movable effect member)
As shown in FIG. 73, (1) after the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, (2) the standby screen display (for example, "Please wait for a while during startup") is displayed on the image display device 16. At the same time, the initial operation is started when the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C are in the standby position (start of the accessory initial operation period).
First, the initial operation 1 is performed by the first movable effect member 17A, (3) the return operation of returning to the standby position is performed when the initial operation 1 is completed, and the image display device 16 is set in advance by the initial setting when the power is turned on. Three production symbols 16a of "1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)" as the determined initial symbols are displayed in a confirmed state. The initial symbol continues to be displayed until the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a) is started.

The effect symbol 16a, which is displayed as a fixed stop after the power is turned on to the game machine 1, is an initial symbol of a display mode indicating that the power is turned on to the game machine 1, and is displayed as a fixed stop in the variable effect. The effect symbol 16a is a determination symbol of a display mode showing a determination result (big hit / loss) of the special game determination.

Following FIG. 73 (3), (4) the initial operation 2 by the third movable effect member 17C is performed, (5) the return operation is performed when the initial operation 2 is completed, and then (6) the second movable The initial operation 3 by the effect member 17B is performed, (7) the return operation is performed when the initial operation 3 is completed, and then (8) the initial operation 4 by the third movable effect member 17C is performed, and (9) the initial stage. When the operation 4 is completed, the return operation is performed, and then (10) the initial operation 5 by the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C is performed, and (11) the initial operation. When 5 is completed, the return operation is performed, and all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (end of the accessory initial operation period).
The LEDs of the panel lighting devices 18 provided on the movable effect members 17A to 17C are lit in a predetermined light emitting mode according to the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C.

As described above, the initial operation pattern is defined so that at least one of the plurality of movable effect members performing the effect operation as the jackpot determination effect finally performs the initial operation. In the initial operation pattern of the movable effect members 17A to 17C of the present embodiment, it is defined that all of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C that perform the effect operation as the jackpot determination effect finally perform the initial operation. ..
The execution order of the initial operation 1 to the initial operation 4 in the initial operation pattern of the present embodiment is other than the order shown above (for example, the order of initial operation 2 → initial operation 1 → initial operation 4 → initial operation 3). However, the final initial operation must be the initial operation 5.

As described above, in executing the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the initial operation corresponding to the effect operation having the lowest importance as the effect related to the special game determination among the various effect operations executed in the variable effect. After starting the movement, the initial movement corresponding to the most important production movement as the production related to the special game judgment is performed last, so that the last initial movement is the most important production movement. It becomes easier for the player to understand that there is something.
Further, when the initial operation corresponding to the most important effect operation is performed first without the player recognizing that the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C has been started, the effect suddenly becomes the effect operation. There is a risk of being surprised and overlooking the initial operation corresponding to the most important production operation. Further, if the initial operation corresponding to the most important effect operation is performed first, it may be misunderstood that the effect operation is being performed and it may not be possible to grasp that the initial operation is being executed.

Further, in the jackpot determination effect involving the operation of the effect button 6a, the player operates the effect button 6a with the expectation that the player will be a big hit while being excited about whether or not the player is a big hit. In addition, if the effect operation of the movable effect member is not performed normally in conjunction with the operation of the effect button 6a, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that the effect is a loss, and the effect of the jackpot determination effect is reduced. Therefore, by performing the initial operation for confirming the effect operation of the movable effect member executed in the determined effect in the initial operation pattern at the end and confirming that it operates normally, the above-mentioned inconvenience is surely avoided. can do.
Further, since the initial operation 5 of the present embodiment is an operation mode for confirming the simultaneous operation of the first to third movable members 17A to 17C executed in conjunction with the operation of the effect button 6a, the first to first operations It is necessary to confirm that each of the third movable effect members 17A to 17C can normally execute the initial operation independently.

In addition to the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, a fourth movable effect member 17D is provided near the lower end of the display unit of the image display device 16, and the effect operation by the fourth movable effect member 17D is determined as a big hit. It may be executed only at the time of production. That is, the fourth movable effect member 17D is a movable effect member dedicated to the jackpot determination effect, and is composed of a flame portion imitating a flame and a blade portion imitating a sword.
When the fourth movable effect member 17D is in the standby position, the flame portion is visible on the front side near the lower end portion of the display portion of the image display device 16, while the blade portion is invisible. ..

As shown in FIG. 74, when the initial operations of the first to fourth movable effect members 17A to 17D are performed according to the initial operation pattern, the initial operation 1 → return operation → third movable effect member 17C by the first movable effect member 17A. Initial operation 2 → Return operation → Initial operation by the second movable effect member 17B 3 → Return operation → Initial operation by the third movable effect member 17C 4 → Return operation → Initial operation by the fourth movable effect member 17D 6 → Return operation It is performed in a predetermined order, and the fourth movable effect member 17D does not operate when the initial operations 1 to 4 are performed.
The initial operation 6 by the fourth movable effect member 17D is an operation mode for confirming the operation of the fourth movable effect member 17D ascending from the standby position to the front side of the central region of the display unit of the image display device 16. (See FIG. 74 (10A)), which corresponds to "the effect operation 6 dedicated to the jackpot determination effect".
Therefore, the initial operation 6 is always performed at the end of the initial operation.
As described above, the initial operation pattern is defined so that the fourth movable effect member 17D, which performs the effect operation 6 at the time of the jackpot determination effect, finally performs the initial operation 6.

(Initial operation of the production button)
In the effect button initial operation process of step S3013 of FIG. 66 described above, it is confirmed that the position state and the like required for operating the button drive motor 6c and the button vibration motor 6d to control the effect operation of the effect button 6a are confirmed. The initial operation of the effect button 6a is executed for the purpose.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an operation mode according to the initial operation pattern of the effect button 6a.
The initial operation of the effect button 6a is performed in a predetermined order of initial operation 1A → initial operation 2A → initial operation 3A according to the initial operation pattern according to the power of the game machine 1 not being cleared by RAM. Will be.
The initial operation 1A is an operation mode for confirming the effect operation in which the effect button 6a vibrates in a normal state that can be operated by the player. The initial operation 1A vibrates for a time different from that at the time of the operation effect executed in response to the operation of the effect button 6a during the operation valid period that occurs during the variation effect. It should be noted that the vibration may be performed for the same time as during the operation effect.
The initial operation 2A is an operation mode for confirming an effect operation in which the effect button 6a moves upward from the normal state to a protruding state.
The initial operation 3A is an operation mode for confirming a return operation in which the effect button 6a returns from the protruding state to the normal state.

FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM.
Further, FIG. 77 is a timing chart ((1) in FIG. 77) for explaining the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the volume / light amount adjustment, and the timing at which the symbol can be displayed after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM. The timing chart of the case).
In FIG. 76 (a), when the power is cut off in the non-game state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed, when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the main The activation processing of the control board 110 and the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 76.
At this point, since the effect control board 130, the image control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 have not been started up, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display). No sound is output from the sound output device 9, the lamps of the various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timings T1 and T2). Make adjustment impossible.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C of the timings T1 to T2 is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 76B, the activation of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 77.
From this timing T2, the image control board 140 prepares for image display until the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, the power restoration command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect symbol display instruction is given as a trigger. As a period, the image display device 16 displays the following standby screen.
The standby screen display is a display including a power restoration image of words such as "Please wait for a while during startup", "Screen display is being restored ...", and "POWER ON". In some cases, nothing is displayed.
In addition, the standby screen display when the power of the game machine 1 with RAM clear is turned on, such as "power is turned on", "initialized", "RAM is cleared", etc. Initialization information image of is displayed. In some cases, nothing is displayed.
That is, the image control board 140 displays the standby screen during the timing T3 when the activation of the main control board 110 is completed from the timing T2 and the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery command from the main control board 110. The game screen described later is not displayed.

Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C (start of the accessory initial operation period). The initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed according to the above-mentioned predetermined initial operation patterns (FIGS. 70, 73, 74).
Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the effect button device 6A from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the effect button 6a. The initial operation of the effect button 6a is performed according to the above-mentioned initial operation pattern (FIG. 75).

Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 as a notification icon for notifying the player that these operations can be performed is not naturally displayed.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at the timing overlapping with the timing T2 at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of the activation of the sub-control board.

In FIG. 76 (c), it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f during the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
In FIG. 76D, the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery command output by the main control board 110. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 77.
With this reception as an opportunity (in the case of (1) in FIG. 77), or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reception, the effect control board 130 gives an instruction to display the effect symbol 16a.
Along with this, the image control board 140 has an effect symbol 16a (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”) and a background image (game) as an initial symbol indicating that the power is turned on to the game machine 1. A game screen for displaying (not shown) and the like (images constituting the background of the variable effect according to the state (effect mode)) is displayed on the image display device 16.
As described above, in the image display device 16, when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the standby screen is displayed, then the game screen is displayed, and the first to third movable effect members 17A The initial operation of ~ 17C is started before the game screen is displayed on the image display device 16.

If the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are being executed (during the initial operation period of the accessory) at the timing T3 when the power recovery command is received from the main control board 110, the effect control board is used. The 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f.
That is, even if a power recovery command is received from the main control board 110 during the initial operation period of the accessory, the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted until the initial operation period of the accessory ends (volume / light amount cannot be adjusted). That is.
Here, the accessory initial operation period is a period until all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the predetermined initial operation pattern are completed.

In FIG. 76 (e), when all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (end of the initial operation period of the accessory), the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 Allows the volume and light amount to be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f, and displays the cross key icon 60. This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 77.

After that, in FIG. 76 (f), the fluctuation pattern designation command related to the loss without reach is output from the main control board 110, and the effect pattern designation command is output from the effect control board 130 that receives the command.
The image control board 140 starts the variable display (from the initial symbol) of the effect symbol 16a (start of the variable effect) on the image display device 16 when the effect pattern designation command is received. This corresponds to the timing T5 in FIG. 77.
It should be noted that the volume / light amount adjustment by operating the cross key 6f may not be possible within 15 frames from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a. In this case, after 15 frames have passed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f.

In FIG. 76 (g), the effect symbol 16a (“2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)” is temporarily stopped. For example, in the temporary stop, the effect symbol 16a in the left region is stopped first and the swing display is displayed. Next, the effect symbol 16a in the right region is stopped to display the swing, and finally, the effect symbol 16a in the center region is stopped to display the rock.
Even if the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped, the volume and light amount can be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f, and the cross key icon 60 is continuously displayed.
In FIG. 76 (h), a symbol confirmation command is output from the main control board 110, and the effect symbol 16a is confirmed by the image control board 140 under the control of the effect control board 130 that has received the symbol confirmation command (transmission of stop instruction data). Stop display. This corresponds to timing T6 in FIG. 77.

Even if the volume / light amount adjustment is permitted (adjustable) during the variable display of the symbol as described above, the volume / light amount adjustment cannot be performed when the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. That is, the symbol confirmation display period is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.
The effect symbol 16a, which is displayed as a fixed stop display after the variation display in the variation effect, is very important for the player because it is a determination symbol showing the result of the jackpot determination. However, if the volume and light amount can be adjusted during the symbol confirmation display period, the player can reliably recognize the type of the determined symbol (hit / miss) by displaying the volume adjustment screen 61 and the light amount adjustment screen 71. There is an inconvenience such as not being able to highlight.
Therefore, when the volume adjustment screen 61 or the light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed during the variable display of the symbol, the result of the jackpot determination is highlighted and notified reliably by hiding it during the symbol confirmation display period. Can be done.
If an error occurs during the display of the volume adjustment screen 61 or the light amount adjustment screen 71, the display of the volume adjustment screen 61 or the light amount adjustment screen 71 is not hidden but continues to be displayed.

When the symbol confirmation display period elapses and the customer waiting command is output from the main control board 110 in FIG. 76 (i), the effect control board 130 and the image control board are received by receiving the customer waiting effect pattern command based on the command. The 140 makes it possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light, and displays the cross key icon 60. Therefore, this corresponds to the timing T7 in FIG. 77.
In the above description, it can be said that the display of the effect symbol 16a and the availability of volume adjustment are controlled as the processing by the image control board 140, but in reality, these controls are input from the main control board 110. It can be said that this is performed by the effect control board 130 that controls the image control board 140 based on the above.

In this way, if the power is cut off during the non-game state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on without clearing the RAM, the period before the initial operation of the accessory Volume / light intensity adjustment is not possible during (timing T1 to timing T2), the initial operation period of the accessory, the initial operation period of the effect button (timing T2 to timing T4), and the symbol confirmation display period (timing T6 to timing T7) in the variable effect. On the other hand, the volume and light intensity are possible during the period (timing T4 to timing T6) before the variable effect is started and the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed after the initial operation period of the character is elapsed, and during the customer waiting state. Adjustment is possible.

Further, the period from when the initial symbol 16a is displayed as a fixed stop after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the volume / light amount can be adjusted, and after the determination symbol 16a is displayed as a fixed stop in the fluctuation effect, the volume / light amount is adjusted. The period until it becomes possible is different.
Specifically, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the period from when the initial symbol 16a is displayed in the stop display mode until the volume / light amount can be adjusted includes the initial operation period of the accessory. , It is longer than the period from when the determination symbol 16a is fixedly stopped and displayed in the fluctuation effect until the volume / light amount can be adjusted.

Further, since the period during which the volume and light amount can be adjusted after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on is after the end of the initial operation period of the accessory, the volume adjustment screen 61 and the volume adjustment screen 61 and the like during the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C When the light amount adjustment screen 71 is displayed, the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C on the front side of the display unit of the image display device 16 covers the display unit, so that the player displays the adjustment screens 61 and 71. It becomes difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to reliably avoid the inconvenience of not being able to grasp the volume and amount of light after the change.

FIG. 78 shows the case where the sub control board (effect control board 130) cannot normally receive the predetermined command output from the main control board 110 after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, or the sub control board (direct control board 110) from the main control board 110. It is a figure explaining the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is not output normally to an effect control board 130).
This shows the case of (2) in FIG. 77.
In FIG. 78 (a), when the power is cut off in the non-gaming state, when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the main control board 110 and the sub control board (effect control board 130, The start-up process of the image control board 140 and the lamp control board 150) is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 77.
At this point, since the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 have not been started, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display), and the sound output device 9 No sound is output from, the lamps of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timings T1 and T2). Make adjustment impossible.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C of the timings T1 to T2 is a period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 78B, the activation of the sub-control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 77.
Similar to the case of FIG. 76, the image control board 140 completes the activation of the main control board 110 from this timing T2 and transmits a power restoration command to the effect control board 130, which triggers the effect control board 130. The game screen is not displayed until the player gives an instruction to display the effect symbol, and the standby screen is displayed as described in FIG. 76 (b).
In addition, it is impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity by operating the cross key 6f. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.

Similar to the case of FIG. 76, the lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern ( Start of the initial operation period of the character).
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at the timing overlapping with the timing T2 at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of the activation of the sub-control board.

In FIG. 78 (c), it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f during the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.

Here, in FIG. 78 (d), the activation of the main control board 110 is completed at the timing T3, but for some reason (noise is generated, half of the command wiring (connector) between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is assumed that the effect control board 130 does not receive (could not) receive the power recovery command from the main control board 110 due to insertion, derailment, etc., or the power recovery command from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is normal. Suppose that it was not output to.
In that case, the image control board 140 does not display the game screen, but continues to display the standby screen.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are arranged regardless of whether or not the effect control board 130 normally receives the power recovery command from the main control board 110 (or from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Since the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the initial operation (regardless of whether or not the power restoration command is normally output), the volume and light amount adjustments cannot be continued. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.

In FIG. 78 (e), the power recovery command is not received (or the power recovery command is not normally output) at the timing T4 when the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed (finished). Since it is in the state), the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.
In FIG. 78 (f), the effect control is performed from the main control board 110 without the effect control board 130 receiving the power recovery command (the power restore command is not normally output from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130). It is assumed that the variation pattern specification command related to the non-reach loss is output to the board 130, and the effect control board 130 receives the variation pattern specification command related to the non-reach loss.
In that case, the image control board 140 displays the game screen when the effect pattern designation command is received from the effect control board 130. This corresponds to the timing T5 in FIG. 77.
In this case, the effect symbol 16a immediately starts the variable display after displaying the stop display mode of the initial symbol (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”) for a moment.

In the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140, all the initial operations of the movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern have already been completed at the time of the timing T5 of the start of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a). Therefore (because it is after the end of the initial operation period), the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted, and the cross key icon 60 is displayed.
It should be noted that the volume and the amount of light may be adjusted when 15 frames have passed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a.

In FIG. 78 (g), the effect symbol 16a (“2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)”) is temporarily stopped.
Even if the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped, the volume and light amount can be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f, and the cross key icon 60 is continuously displayed.
In FIG. 78 (h), the symbol confirmation command is output from the main control board 110, and the image control board 140 is controlled by the effect control board 130 that has received the symbol confirmation command (transmission of stop instruction data). 2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger) ") is fixed and stopped. This corresponds to the timing T6 in FIG. 77.
As described above, even if the volume / light amount adjustment is permitted during the variable display of the effect symbol in the variable effect, the volume / light amount adjustment cannot be performed at the time of the symbol confirmation display.
After the symbol confirmation stop display is displayed, the customer waiting command is output from the main control board 110 in FIG. 78 (i), and the image control board 140 can adjust the volume and the amount of light by receiving the customer waiting effect pattern command based on the command. Then, the cross key icon 60 is displayed. This corresponds to the timing T7 in FIG. 77.

FIG. 79 shows a case where the sub control board (effect control board 130) cannot receive a predetermined command output from the main control board 110 after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, or the sub control board (effect control) is shown from the main control board 110. It is a figure explaining the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is not output normally to a substrate 130).
This shows the case of (3) in FIG. 77.
In FIG. 79 (a), when the power is cut off in the non-game state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed and the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the main control is performed. The activation processing of the board 110 and the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 77.
At this point, since the effect control board 120 and the image control board 150 have not been started, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display), and the sound output device is used. No sound is output, the lamps of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timing T1 and timing T2). The amount of light cannot be adjusted.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C of the timings T1 to T2 is a period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 79B, the activation of the sub-control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 77.
Similar to the case of FIG. 76, the image control board 140 completes the activation of the main control board 110 from this timing T2 and transmits a power restoration command to the effect control board 130, which triggers the effect control board 130. Does not display the game screen, but displays the standby screen diagram (see FIG. 76 (b)) until the player gives an instruction to display the effect symbol (timing T3 in FIG. 77).

Similar to the case of FIG. 76, the lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern ( Start of the initial operation period of the character).
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at the timing overlapping with the timing T2 at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of the activation of the sub-control board.

In FIG. 79 (c), during the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, it is continuously impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.

Here, in FIG. 79 (d), the activation of the main control board 110 is completed at the timing T3, but for some reason (noise is generated, half of the command wiring (connector) between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is assumed that the effect control board 130 did not receive (could not) receive the power recovery command from the main control board 110 due to insertion, derailment, etc. Suppose that it was not output to.
In that case, the image control board 140 does not display the game screen, but continues to display the standby screen.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are arranged regardless of whether or not the effect control board 130 normally receives the power recovery command from the main control board 110 (or from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Since the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the initial operation (regardless of whether or not the power restoration command is normally output), the volume and light amount adjustments cannot be continued. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.

In FIG. 79 (e), the power recovery command is not received at the timing T4 when all the initial operations of the movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (the initial operation period of the accessory has ended). (Or the state in which the power restoration command is not normally output), the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.
In FIG. 79 (f), that is, at the timing T5 of FIG. 77, when the effect control board 130 cannot receive the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 (or the power recovery command is issued from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. If the output is not normal), the image control board 140 does not display the game screen, but continues to display the standby screen.
Further, in the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140, even if the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C have already been completed (finished), the volume / light amount adjustment cannot be continued. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the symbol confirmation command or the customer waiting command related to the reachless loss output from the main control board 110 in FIG. 79 (g), the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are initially displayed. Since all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the operation pattern have already been completed, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted. This corresponds to the timing T6 or T7 in FIG. 77.
Further, a cross key icon 60 for notifying the player that the volume / light amount adjustment operation can be performed is displayed. It should be noted that the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted from the time when the symbol confirmation command is received until the end of the symbol confirmation display period. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.
At this point, the game screen is displayed. The effect symbol a displayed on the game screen in this case is an initial symbol (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”, “XXX”, etc.).
When "XXX" is displayed, when the next fluctuation starts, the stop display mode of the initial symbol ("1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)") is displayed for a moment, and then the effect symbol 16a is immediately displayed. Start variable display.

FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is not normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM.
80 (a) to (g) are the same as in FIGS. 76 (a) to (g).
However, after the effect symbol 16a in FIG. 80 (g) is temporarily stopped, in FIG. 80 (h), for some reason (noise is generated, the command wiring (connector) between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is half-inserted. , Derailment, etc.) may prevent the effect control board 130 from receiving the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 110 (or the symbol confirmation command may not be normally output from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130). Conceivable.
In that case, as shown in FIG. 80 (i), the game machine 1 cannot display the effect symbol 16a as a fixed stop, and continues the temporary stop (swing display). In addition, it does not (cannot) shift to the customer waiting state.
However, when the volume / light amount can be adjusted during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the volume / light amount can be continuously adjusted even in the state as shown in FIG. 80.
On the contrary, when the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the effect control board 130 is in the customer waiting state when the finalized symbol command and the subsequent customer waiting command cannot be received. Since it does not shift, the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted.

(Change form of the period until the volume and light intensity can be adjusted after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM)
In the above description, the power is cut off in the non-game state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed, and the initial operation period of the accessory after the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on. Although it was not possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light until the end of the above, the volume and the amount of light may be adjusted from the middle of the initial operation period of the accessory (before the end of the initial operation period of the accessory).
FIG. 81 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which the volume / light amount adjustment and the symbol display are possible in the game machine 1.
Further, FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM. ..

In FIG. 82 (a), when the power is cut off in the non-game state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed and the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the main control is performed. The activation processing of the board 110 and the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 81.
At this point, since the effect control board 130, the image control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 have not been started up, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display). No sound is output from the sound output device 9, the lamps of the various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timing T1 and timing T2). The amount of light cannot be adjusted.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C of the timings T1 to T2 is a period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 82B, the activation of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 81.
From this timing T2, the image control board 140 displays the game screen until the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, the power restoration command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect symbol display instruction is given as a trigger. Is not performed, and the standby screen is displayed.
That is, the image control board 140 does not display the game screen between the timing T2 and the timing T3.

The lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern (start of the accessory initial operation period). ..
Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the effect button device 6A from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the effect button 6a related to the initial operation pattern.

Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at the timing overlapping with the timing T2 at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of the activation of the sub-control board.

In FIG. 82 (c), it is continuously impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f during the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 that notifies the player that these operations can be performed is not naturally displayed.

In FIG. 82D, the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration command output by the main control board 110. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 81.
With this reception as an opportunity (in the case of (1A) in FIG. 81), or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reception, the effect control board 130 gives an instruction to display the effect symbol 16a.
Along with this, the image control board 140 displays the game screen for displaying the effect symbol 16a (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”) as the initial symbol and the background image on the image display device 16. ..
The game screen also includes a variable effect screen, a jackpot effect screen, a customer waiting screen, a menu screen, and the like.

Further, even if the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are executing the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C at the timing T3 when the power restoration command is received from the main control board 110. , The volume and light amount can be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f, and the cross key icon 60 is displayed. The cross key icon 60 is displayed a few seconds after the game screen is displayed. That is, the game screen display period is a period in which the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted. The volume and light intensity may be adjusted at the same time as the display of the game screen. That is, the cross key icon 60 may be displayed at the same time as the display of the game screen.

Here, at the time of timing T3, the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are completed up to the initial operations 1 to 3 of all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern. ..
In the initial operation period of the accessory, the period during which the initial operations 1 to 3 are executed is the first half period (first period), and the period during which the initial operations 4 and 5 are executed is the second half period (after the first period). If it is set to (second period), the volume and light amount can be adjusted from the time when the latter half of the initial operation period of the accessory is started, and the cross key icon is displayed.
In FIG. 82 (e), even if the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f in FIG. 82 (d), all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are performed. The initial operation is continuously performed until the above is completed.
Subsequent (f) to (i) of FIG. 82 are the same as the cases of (f) to (i) of FIG. 76.

In this way, the first half period (first period) of the initial operation period of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is the period in which the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted, while the latter half period (the second period after the first period). Period 2) is the period during which the volume and light intensity can be adjusted.
That is, when the predetermined initial operation (initial operation 3) of all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern is completed, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted, and the cross key icon 60 is displayed.
Further, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at a timing that overlaps with the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started. It can be said that the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted at a timing that overlaps with the specific timing at which the accessory operation is performed.

At the time of timing T3, when the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are completed up to the initial operations 1 and 2 of all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern. The period in which the initial operations 1 and 2 are executed is the first half period, and the period in which the initial operations 3 to 5 are executed is the second half period.
At the time of timing T3, the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C have completed the initial operations 1 to 4 of all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern. In this case, the period during which the initial operations 1 to 4 are executed is defined as the first half period, and the period during which the initial operations 5 are executed is defined as the second half period.

(Change form of start timing of initial operation of movable effect member after power on without RAM clear)
Regarding the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, in the above description, the initial operation is started when the start of the sub control boards (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. However, it may be started when a power recovery command is received from the main control board 110.
FIG. 83 is a timing chart for explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member, the volume / light amount adjustment, and the timing at which the symbol can be displayed in the game machine 1.
Further, FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM. ..

In FIG. 84 (a), when the power is cut off in the non-game state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed and the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the main control is performed. The activation processing of the board 110 and the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 83.
At this point, since the effect control board 130, the image control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 have not been started up, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display). No sound is output from the sound output device 9, the lamps of the various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timing T1 and timing T2). The amount of light cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 84B, the activation of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 83.
From this timing T2, the image control board 140 displays the game screen until the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, the power restoration command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect symbol display instruction is given as a trigger. Is not performed, and the standby screen is displayed.

Further, the image control board 140 does not display the game screen from the timing T2 to the timing T3, but continuously displays the standby screen.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f between the timing T2 and the timing T3. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.

Further, the lamp control board 150 performs the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C and the initial operation of the effect button 6a while the standby screen is displayed between the timing T2 and the timing T3. Absent.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C of the timings T1 to T3 is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.
If any or all of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are not in the standby position at the time of timing T2, the lamp control board 150 performs a return operation to the standby position.

In FIG. 84 (c), the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration command output by the main control board 110. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG.
With this reception as an opportunity, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reception, the effect control board 130 gives an instruction to display the effect symbol 16a.
Along with this, the image control board 140 has an effect symbol 16a (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”) as an initial symbol indicating that the power is turned on to the game machine 1 and a background image (game). The image display device 16 displays a game screen for displaying (not shown) and the like (images constituting the background of the variation effect according to the state). The combination display mode of the effect symbol 16a as the initial symbol is predetermined.

Further, the lamp control board 150 starts the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C from the timing T3, and also starts the initial operation of the effect button 6a.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 enable the volume and light amount to be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f from this timing T3, and display the cross key icon 60.
Therefore, when the timing overlaps with the timing T3 at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted, and when the timing overlaps with the timing T3 to the timing T4 at which the initial operation is performed, It means that the volume and light intensity can be adjusted.

In FIG. 84 (d), even if the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted, the initial operation continues until all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed. It is done. This corresponds to timing T3 to timing T4 in FIG. 83.
In FIG. 84 (e), all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (end of the accessory initial operation period). This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 83.
Subsequent (f) to (i) of FIG. 84 are the same as the cases of (f) to (i) of FIG. 76.

In this way, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on and the game screen is displayed on the image display device 16, the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C and the initial operation of the effect button are started, and the volume and the amount of light are increased. Adjustment is possible.
That is, the initial operation period of the accessory is the period in which the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted.

After the power is turned on, when the power recovery command is not normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130), or when the fluctuation pattern specification command is not normally output, or the sub control When the board (effect control board 130) cannot normally receive the power recovery command from the main control board 110 or the fluctuation pattern specification command cannot be normally received, (2) and (3) in FIG. 77 described above. ), The same as in the cases of (2) and (3) in FIG. 81.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, as the second embodiment, it is possible to adjust the volume and light amount by operating the cross key 6f and the initial operation period of the movable effect members 17A to 17C when the power of the game machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on. Explain the period.
Here, a part different from the first embodiment when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on will be mainly described.

(Initial operation of movable production member)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C when the power of the game machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on.
This initial operation pattern is the same as the initial operation pattern of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear described in FIG. 70 (1) is turned on. It is an aspect.
Therefore, when the power of the game machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on and the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are performed, the effect operation 5 executed in the jackpot determination effect according to the initial operation pattern is performed. The corresponding initial operation 5 is performed last.

When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the operation modes of the initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are different depending on whether the game machine 1 is turned on, with or without RAM clear. May be good. However, the final initial operation performed in the initial operation pattern is an operation mode corresponding to the effect operation of the jackpot determination effect.
For example, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, in the initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C when the RAM is cleared, the initial operation 2 and the initial operation 3 are performed at the same time. However, the initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C in the case where the RAM is not cleared do not include the operation mode in which the initial operation 2 and the initial operation 3 are performed at the same time.
As described above, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C with the RAM clear are executed in the initial operation pattern without the RAM clear. It will include initial actions that are not done.
Therefore, if the operation mode of the initial operation pattern is different between the case with RAM clear and the case without RAM clear, the initial operation period of the accessory and the period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted are different.
Specifically, when the initial operation period of the accessory is the period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted, or when the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory is the period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted, for example, RAM is cleared. In the case of the initial operation pattern in which the number of initial operation steps of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is larger than in the case of accompanied by RAM clear, the case of accompanied by RAM clear is better. Compared with the case without RAM clear, the initial operation period of the accessory is longer, and the period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted is also longer.
On the contrary, for example, in the case of the initial operation pattern in which the number of initial operation steps of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is larger than in the case of accompanied by RAM clear, the RAM is cleared. The initial operation period of the accessory is longer and the period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted is longer in the case without the RAM than in the case with the RAM clear.

In addition, regardless of whether the operation mode of the initial operation pattern of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is the same operation mode with or without RAM clear, the first 1st to 3rd movable effect members 17A to 17C. The LED light emitting modes of the panel lighting devices 18 provided in the third movable effect members 17A to 17C are different.
Specifically, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on and the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C perform the initial operation, the LED lights up in blue when the RAM is cleared. It is a light emitting mode in which the LED lights up in red when it is not accompanied by clearing.
After the power is turned on, the player can grasp whether or not the power is turned on with RAM clear depending on the light emitting mode of the LED of the panel lighting device 18 during the execution of the initial operation of the movable effect member.
It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is different depending on whether the RAM clear is accompanied or not, and the LED light emission mode of the panel lighting device 18 is also different. It may be different.
After the power is turned on, the player can surely grasp whether or not the power is turned on with RAM clear depending on the operation mode of the movable effect member and the light emitting mode of the LED of the panel lighting device 18.

The initial operation pattern of the effect button 6a when the power is turned on with RAM clear is the same as the initial operation pattern of the effect button 6a when the power is turned on without RAM clear shown in FIG. 75. It may be a different operation mode.
When the initial operation pattern of the effect button 6a is different, an operation mode (for example, performing a rotation operation in a normal state) that is not executed by the initial operation pattern of the effect button 6a at power-on without clearing the RAM is performed, or the RAM is performed. In the initial operation pattern of the effect button 6a when the power is turned on without clearing, a part of the operation mode to be executed is not performed (for example, the vibration operation is not performed).
Further, regarding the initial light emission display of the button light emitting LED 6e of the effect button 6a at the time of turning on the power, the light emission mode may be different or the same depending on whether the RAM is cleared or not.
When the initial light emission display of the button light emitting LED 6e is different, for example, the button LED 6a repeatedly lights and blinks in the order of red → green → blue when accompanied by RAM clear, while the button is not accompanied by RAM clear. This is done in a light emitting mode in which the LED 6a lights up in white.

(Voice notification by the voice output device when the power is turned on and light emission notification by the frame lighting device)
FIG. 86 is a diagram relating to a voice notification output from the voice output device 9 and a light emission notification by the frame lighting device 27 when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on in the case where the RAM is cleared and the case where the RAM is not cleared. Is.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on, the image control board 140 performs voice notification regarding RAM clear. For example, "memory is cleared", "ram is cleared", "initialized", and output from the audio output device 9.
The image control board 140 repeatedly outputs the sound related to the RAM clear from the sound output device 9 from the start to the end of the RAM clear process. The sound related to RAM clear is output at a preset volume (for example, maximum volume), and the volume cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f.
The RAM clear dedicated sound effect (for example, the “pip pip ... pip” sound effect) may be output together with the voice, or the RAM clear dedicated sound effect may be output instead of the voice.
When the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the image control board 140 notifies the sound and sound effects different from those when the power of the game machine 1 with RAM clear is turned on ( For example, a voice such as "Power is turned on").
In this way, when the power of the gaming machine 1 accompanied by RAM clearing is turned on, a voice related to RAM clearing and a RAM-dedicated sound effect are output to notify the player that the RAM has been cleared. It is possible to surely grasp whether or not the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on.

The lamp control board 150 initially of the frame lighting device 27 according to a predetermined initial light emission pattern regardless of whether the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the RAM is cleared, or the RAM is not cleared. Light emission notification is performed.
When the power of the game machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on, the decorative lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 27 repeatedly lights and blinks in the order of red → green → blue to perform the initial light emission display.
When the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the decorative lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 27 repeatedly lights and blinks in the order of white → purple to perform the initial light emission display.
In this way, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the light emission mode of the initial light emission display of the decorative lamp differs depending on whether the game machine 1 is accompanied by RAM clearing or not, and when RAM clearing is accompanied. Since the notification is made with a display color including red, which emphasizes the light emission display mode as compared with the case without RAM clear, the power is turned on with RAM clear depending on the color of the lamp when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on. It is possible to surely grasp whether or not it is.

FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on with the RAM clear.
Further, FIG. 88 is a timing chart for explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member, the volume / light amount adjustment, and the timing at which the symbol can be displayed when the power of the gaming machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on.
In FIG. 87 (a), when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on in the gaming machine 1 in the power off state, and then the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch 58c is continuously turned on, the main control board 110 , The activation process of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 88.
The main control board 110 starts the start-up process when the power switch is turned on, and executes the used area clear process of the main RAM 110c when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on in this start-up process (FIG. FIG. RAM clear processing in step S4 of 12).
At this point, since the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 have not been started, no information image regarding the power-on is displayed on the image display device 16, and no sound is output from the sound output device 9. The lamps of the various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) do not light, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timing T1 and timing T2). The amount of light cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 87 (b), the activation of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 88.
From this timing T2, the image control board 140 completes the activation of the main control board 110 and transmits a power-on command to the effect control board 130, which is triggered by the effect control board 130 to give an instruction to display the effect symbol. Until then, the game screen is not displayed.

The lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern (start of the accessory initial operation period). ..
The operation mode of the initial operation pattern is the same as or different from the operation mode of the initial operation pattern executed when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on.
Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the effect button device 6A from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the effect button 6a related to the initial operation pattern.
Therefore, the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is accompanied by RAM clear (FIG. 87 (b)) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on (FIG. 76 (b)). In any case of)), it will be started when the start-up of the sub control board is completed.
Further, the initial operation of the effect button 6a is also started when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, when the activation of the sub control board is completed.

Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 as a notification icon for notifying the player that these operations can be performed is not naturally displayed.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at the timing overlapping with the timing T2 at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of the activation of the sub-control board.

In FIG. 87 (c), the effect control board 130 receives the RAM clear designation command output by the main control board 110 during the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 88.
Upon receiving this RAM clear designation command, the effect control board 130 issues a voice notification instruction regarding RAM clear.
Along with this, the image control board 140 performs voice notification regarding RAM clear, and repeatedly outputs, for example, the voice of "memory cleared" from the voice output device 9 until the RAM clear process is completed. This corresponds to the RAM clear voice notification period of timings T3 to T6 in FIG. 88.
Even if voice notification regarding RAM clear is performed, the lamp control board 150 continues the initial operation until all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed. To do.

The effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f during the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.
Further, the lamp control board 150 repeats the initial light emission notification in a light emitting mode in which the decorative lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 27 is lit and blinked in the order of red → green → blue from the timing T3 until the voice notification is completed.

In FIG. 87 (d), when the voice notification related to RAM clear is executed even after the initial operation period of the accessory is completed (initial operation is completed), the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are operated by the cross key 6f. It will continue to be impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity by. Also, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed. This corresponds to the timing T5 in FIG. 88.

In FIG. 87 (e), the voice notification related to RAM clear ends with the completion of the RAM clear process. This corresponds to the timing T6 in FIG. 88.
The effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 enable the volume and light amount to be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f from this timing T6, and display the cross key icon 60.

In FIG. 87 (f), when any of the up and down keys of the cross key 6f is operated, the volume adjustment screen 61 that displays the volume gauge 62 indicating the currently set volume is displayed, and the volume adjustment screen 61 that is currently set is displayed. The current volume confirmation sound (“Pyrroline ♪”) is output at the current volume, and when the up key (or down key) is operated again in FIG. 87 (g), the volume gauge 62 indicating the changed volume is displayed. At the same time, a volume change confirmation sound (“la” in the trumpet sound) is output at the changed volume.

In this way, when the power of the game machine 1 with RAM clear is turned on, the movable effect members 17A to 17C are adjusted according to the initial operation pattern, as in the case of the case where the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on. It is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light from the start of the initial operation until the completion of all the initial operations related to the initial operation pattern (until the end of the initial operation period).
Further, when the power of the game machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on, if the voice notification related to RAM clear is being executed even after the initial operation period of the accessory is completed, the volume is increased until the voice notification is completed.・ It is impossible to adjust the amount of light.
When it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity during the execution of the voice notification related to RAM clear, the player confirms the volume change due to the overlap between the voice related to RAM clear and the volume change confirmation sound output when adjusting the volume. It is possible to surely avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in hearing the sound and confusion, and it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light under suitable conditions.

On the other hand, when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the voice notification regarding RAM clear is not executed, so that the volume and light amount can be adjusted after the end of the initial operation period of the accessory. Is.
During the period from when the power of the game machine 1 with RAM clear is turned on until the volume and light amount can be adjusted, the volume and light amount can be adjusted after the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on. It is longer than the period until.

Further, when the power of the gaming machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on, the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on from the state where the power switch is turned off. Rather than turning on the RAM clear switch 58c and the power switch at the same time, turning on the RAM clear switch 58c in advance before turning on the power switch makes it possible to smoothly turn on and off the power switch. , The RAM clearing process can be reliably executed when the power is turned on.
Further, when the power of the game machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on to adjust the volume and the amount of light, the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 58 → power switch → left or right key operation order of the cross key 6f is obtained, so that the RAM is cleared. It is possible to reliably avoid the inconvenience that the volume and light amount are adjusted before the processing is completed.

(Change form of the period until the volume and light intensity can be adjusted after turning on the power with RAM clear)
In the above explanation, it was not possible to adjust the volume and light intensity from the time when the power of the game machine 1 with RAM clear was turned on until the end of the initial operation period of the accessory, but the volume was adjusted from the middle of the initial operation period of the accessory. -The amount of light may be adjusted.
FIG. 89 is a timing chart illustrating the initial operation of the movable effect member, the volume / light amount adjustment, and the timing at which the symbol can be displayed when the power of the gaming machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on.
Further, FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on with RAM clear.

In FIG. 90A, when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on in the gaming machine 1 in the power off state, and then the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch 58c is continuously turned on, the main control board 110 , The activation process of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 89.
The main control board 110 starts the start-up process when the power switch is turned on, and transmits a RAM clear designation command to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on in this start-up process. Next, the used area clearing process of the main RAM 110c is executed (step S4 RAM clearing process of FIG. 12).
At this point, since the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 have not been started, no information image regarding the power-on is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display), and the sound output device 9 starts. No sound is output, the lamps of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timing T1 and timing T2). The amount of light cannot be adjusted. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 as a notification icon for notifying the player that these operations can be performed is not naturally displayed.

In FIG. 90B, the activation of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 89.
The lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern (start of the accessory initial operation period). ..
Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the effect button device 6A from the timing T2 to start the initial operation of the effect button 6a related to the initial operation pattern.

Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at the timing overlapping with the timing T2 at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of the activation of the sub-control board.

In FIG. 90 (c), the effect control board 130 receives the power-on command output from the main control board 110 during the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 89.
When the power-on command is received, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reception, the effect control board 130 issues a display instruction of the effect symbol and a voice notification instruction regarding RAM clear.
Along with this, the image control board 140 displays the game screen, performs voice notification regarding RAM clear, and repeats, for example, the voice of "memory cleared" from the voice output device 9 until the RAM clear process is completed. Output. This corresponds to the RAM clear voice notification period between the timing T3 and the timing T6 in FIG. 89.

The lamp control board 150 continues the initial operation until the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are completed even if the voice notification regarding the RAM clear is performed.
Further, the lamp control board 150 repeats the initial light emission notification in a light emitting mode in which the decorative lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 27 is lit and blinked in the order of red → green → blue from the timing T3 until the voice notification is completed.

From this timing T3, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 enable the volume and light amount to be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f even when the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the initial operation. The key icon 60 is displayed.
Here, at the time of timing T3, the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are completed up to the initial operations 1 to 3 of all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern. ..
In the initial operation period of the accessory, the period during which the initial operations 1 to 3 are executed is the first half period of the initial operation period of the accessory, and the period during which the initial operations 4 and 5 are executed is the second half period of the initial operation period of the accessory. In this case, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted from the time when the latter half of the initial operation period of the accessory is started.
As described above, the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted in the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, while the volume / light amount can be adjusted in the latter half period.

In FIG. 90 (d), the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C and the RAM clearing process are continuously performed. This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 89.

In FIG. 90 (e), the voice notification related to the RAM clear is continuously performed, but all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (initial operation of the accessory). The period ends). This corresponds to the timing T5 in FIG. 89.
Here, if the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 6f while the voice notification related to RAM clear is being executed, the volume confirmation sound and the volume change confirmation sound are not currently output because the output of the voice related to RAM clear is prioritized. .. Therefore, the player confirms that the current volume and the volume have been changed by visually recognizing the display of the volume gauge 62 on the volume adjustment screen 61.

In FIG. 90 (f), the voice notification related to RAM clear ends with the completion of the RAM clear process. This corresponds to the timing T6 in FIG. 89.
In FIG. 90 (g), the customer waiting command is output from the main control board 110, and the customer waiting effect pattern command based on the command is output, so that the image control board 140 displays the customer waiting demo screen.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 enable the volume and light amount to be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f, and display the cross key icon 60.

(Change form of start timing of initial operation of movable effect member after power is turned on with RAM clear)
Regarding the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, in the above description, the initial operation is started when the start of the sub control boards (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. However, it may be started when the RAM clear designation command is received from the main control board 110.
FIG. 91 is a timing chart for explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member, the volume / light amount adjustment, and the timing at which the symbol can be displayed in the game machine 1.
Further, FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on with RAM clear.

In FIG. 92A, when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on in the gaming machine 1 in the power off state, and then the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch 58c is continuously turned on, the main control board 110 , The activation process of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 91.
The main control board 110 starts the start-up process when the power switch is turned on, and executes the used area clear process of the main RAM 110c when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on in this start-up process (FIG. FIG. Step S4 RAM clear process in step 12).
At this point, since the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 have not been started, no information image regarding the power-on is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display), and the sound output device 9 starts. No sound is output, the lamps of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timing T1 and timing T2).・ It is impossible to adjust the amount of light. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.

In FIG. 92B, the activation of the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 91.
The image control board 140 continues to display the standby screen (“Please wait for a while during startup”) from this timing T2 until the RAM clear designation command is received from the main control board 110.

Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f from the timing T2 to the timing T3. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
Further, the lamp control board 150 does not perform the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C and the initial operation of the effect button 6a from the timing T2 to the timing T3.
Therefore, the period before the initial operation of the accessory is a period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.
When any or all of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are not in the standby position at the time of timing T2, the lamp control board 150 is returned to the standby position.

In FIG. 92C, the effect control board 130 receives the power-on command output from the main control board 110. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG.
When the power-on command is received, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reception, the effect control board 130 issues a display instruction of the effect symbol and a voice notification instruction regarding RAM clear.
Along with this, the image control board 140 displays the game screen, performs voice notification regarding RAM clear, and repeats, for example, the voice of "memory cleared" from the voice output device 9 until the RAM clear process is completed. Output. This corresponds to the RAM clear voice notification period from the timing T3 to the timing T6 in FIG.

Further, the lamp control board 150 starts the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern from this timing T3, and also starts the initial operation of the effect button 6a related to the initial operation pattern. ..
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 enable the volume and light amount to be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f from this timing T3, and display the cross key icon 60.
As described above, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted at the timing when the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started and the timing when the voice notification regarding the RAM clear is started.

In FIG. 92 (d), even if the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted, the initial operation continues until all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed. It is done. This corresponds to the period from timing T3 to timing T5 in FIG. 91.
Further, even if the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted, the voice notification regarding the RAM clear is performed until the RAM clear process is completed. This corresponds to the period from timing T3 to timing T6 in FIG. 91.

In FIG. 92 (e), all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (end of the accessory initial operation period). This corresponds to the timing T5 in FIG. 91.
In FIG. 92 (f), the voice notification related to RAM clear ends with the completion of the RAM clear process. This corresponds to the timing T6 in FIG. 91.
In FIG. 92 (g), the customer waiting command is output from the main control board 110, and the customer waiting effect pattern command based on the output is received, so that the image control board 140 displays the customer waiting demo screen.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 enable the volume and light amount to be adjusted by operating the cross key 6f, and display the cross key icon 60.

In this way, the volume and light amount can be adjusted when the timing overlaps with the timing when the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted even when the initial operation is performed. It means that there is. That is, the initial operation period of the accessory is the period in which the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted.

In the above explanation, it was possible to adjust the volume and light intensity during both the initial operation period of the accessory and the voice notification period related to RAM clear, but when the timing overlaps with the timing when the initial operation of the accessory is started, the volume and light intensity are adjusted. The amount of light may not be adjusted.

FIG. 93 is a timing chart for explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member, the volume / light amount adjustment, and the timing at which the symbol can be displayed in the game machine 1. Here, a part different from the timing chart shown in FIG. 91 will be described.

In the game machine 1 in the power-off state, after the power of the game machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on, the sound related to the start timing T3 of the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C and the RAM clear related to the initial operation pattern. At the notification start timing T3, the volume and light amount cannot be adjusted. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.

The volume and the amount of light can be adjusted from the timing T5 at which all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is displayed. That is, the initial operation period of the accessory is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.
At the time of timing T5, the voice notification regarding the RAM clear is not finished, and at the timing T6, the voice notification is finished. When the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 6f between the timing T5 and the timing T6, the output of the sound related to RAM clear is prioritized, so that the current volume confirmation sound and the volume change confirmation sound are not output. Therefore, the player can grasp that the current volume and the volume have been changed by visually recognizing the display of the volume gauge 62 on the volume adjustment screen 61.
As described above, even if the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted during the RAM clear voice notification period, the current volume confirmation sound and the volume change confirmation sound are not output.

FIG. 94 is a timing chart for explaining the initial operation of the movable effect member, the volume / light amount adjustment, and the timing at which the symbol can be displayed in the game machine 1. Here, a part different from the timing chart shown in FIG. 91 will be described.

In the game machine 1 in the power-off state, after the power of the game machine 1 accompanied by RAM clear is turned on, the sound related to the start timing T3 of the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C and the RAM clear related to the initial operation pattern. At the notification start timing T3, the volume and light amount cannot be adjusted. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.

It is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even at the timing T5 when all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.
At the time of timing T5, the voice notification regarding the RAM clear is not finished, and at the timing T6, the voice notification is finished. From this timing T6, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is displayed.
In this way, the initial operation period of the accessory and the RAM clear voice notification period are periods in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

(Third Embodiment)
Next, as a third embodiment, the power is cut off during the gaming state in which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (or the jackpot game is being executed), and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. The initial operation period of the accessory and the period in which the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted will be described in the case where the movable effect members 17A to 17C are used.

FIG. 95 shows the initial operation and volume of the accessories of the movable effect members 17A to 17C when the power is cut off during the execution of the normal variation effect of the variation effect pattern of the loss without reach and the power of the game machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart explaining the timing when the light amount adjustment becomes possible.
Further, FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is restored.

In FIG. 96A, this loss fluctuation pattern (variation time) is based on the fact that the loss fluctuation pattern (variation time: 8 seconds) of the first special symbol is determined when the special game determination is the determination result of loss. ), The variation effect pattern of the non-reach loss that does not generate the reach state is determined, and the normal variation effect of the variation effect pattern of the non-reach loss (hereinafter, the normal variation effect of the reachless loss) is performed.
In the image display device 16, a background image (for example, a background image imagining spring) corresponding to the normal mode corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, and three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 16b. The icon is displayed and the second hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display area 16c, the hold number "3" is displayed in the first hold number display area 16e, and the second hold number display area is displayed. The reserved number "0" is displayed on 16f.

The variable display of the three effect symbols 16a is started, and the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 95. Since the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the cross key icon 60 is displayed as a notification icon for notifying the player that these operations can be performed.

In FIG. 96 (b), after the variation of the effect symbol 16a starts, the effect symbol 16a of "6 (tiger)" is temporarily stopped in the left region.
In FIG. 96 (c), the power supply is cut off while the effect symbol 16a fluctuates in the right side region and the center region. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 95. At the time of this timing T2, the effect elapsed time (variation display elapsed time of the special symbol) of the normal variation effect of the loss without reach is set to, for example, 4 seconds.

In FIG. 96 (d), when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the activation process of the main control board 110 and the sub control boards (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. Is started. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 95.
At this point, since the effect control board 120 and the image control board 150 have not been started, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 31 (solid black display), and the sound output device is displayed. No sound is output, the lamps of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timing T3 and timing T4). The amount of light cannot be adjusted.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C between the timing T3 and the timing T4 is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 96E, the image control board 140 starts displaying the standby screen (“Please wait for a while while the screen is returning”) on the image display device 16, and then the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control). The start-up of the board 140 and the lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 95.

The lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T4 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C (start of the accessory initial operation period). The initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed according to the above-mentioned predetermined initial operation patterns (FIGS. 70, 73, 74).
Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the effect button device 6A from the timing T4 to start the initial operation of the effect button 6a. The initial operation of the effect button 6a is performed according to the above-mentioned initial operation pattern (FIG. 75).

Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at a timing that overlaps with the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of activation of the sub-control board.

In FIG. 96 (f), the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration command output from the main control board 110. This corresponds to the timing T5 in FIG. 95.
The image control board 140 displays the power recovery screen on the image display device 16 on the occasion of this reception. That is, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 16a) that was executed when the power was cut off is not displayed.
The power recovery screen display is a display including a power recovery image and a game restart information image of words such as "Please restart the game during power recovery."

In FIG. 96 (g), the image display device 16 continues to display the power recovery screen. The power recovery screen shows the remaining production time (remaining fluctuation time) of the normal fluctuation effect of the reachless loss that was executed when the power was cut off (preset effect time (8 seconds) -power off from the start of fluctuation. The effect elapsed time (4 seconds) = 4 seconds)) until the occurrence of is continued to be displayed. Volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted during the power recovery screen display period. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed.
That is, the power recovery screen display period is a period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 96 (h), the effect control board 130 receives the symbol determination command output from the main control board 110. This corresponds to timing T6 in FIG. 95. The image control board 140 ends the power recovery screen display on the image display device 16 and displays the game screen when the symbol confirmation command is received. However, even if the game screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light from the time when the symbol confirmation command is received until the end of the symbol confirmation display period. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.
On this game screen, the effect symbol 16a (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”) as the initial symbol indicating that the power of the game machine 1 is turned on is displayed in the stop display mode, and also. A background image (not shown) corresponding to the normal mode is displayed.
That is, if a power failure occurs during the normal fluctuation effect of the variation effect pattern of the reachless loss, the power of the game machine 1 is turned on instead of the determination symbol of the result mode of notifying the reachless loss after the power is restored. The initial symbol to be shown is displayed in the stop display mode.
While recognizing that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power was cut off has ended, it is possible to draw attention to the next fluctuation effect, avoiding the inconvenience of confusing the player after the power is restored, and the interest of the game. Can be improved.

Even if the game screen is displayed on the image display device 16, the initial operation is continuously performed until the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed.
Here, at the time of the timing T7 when the symbol confirmation display period ends, the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is the initial operation 1 of all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern. ~ 3 is completed.
In the initial operation period of the accessory, if the period during which the initial operations 1 to 3 are executed is the first half period and the period during which the initial operations 4 to 5 are executed is the second half period, the latter half period of the initial operation period of the accessory is the volume.・ It can be said that the light intensity can be adjusted.

In FIG. 96 (i), the variation pattern designation command is output from the main control board 110, and the variation effect pattern designation command is output from the effect control board 130 that receives the command.
The image control board 140 starts the variation display (from the initial symbol) of the effect symbol 16a on the image display device 16 when the variation effect pattern designation command is received. This corresponds to timing T7 in FIG. 95.
The effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 can continue to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also continuously displayed.
In FIG. 96 (j), the effect symbol 16a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped in the left region in the variation effect.

When the power-on command is not normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub-control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on with RAM clear in FIGS. 88, 89, and 93 described above, or When the sub control board (effect control board 130) cannot normally receive the power-on command from the main control board 110, it is the same as in (2) and (3) in FIG. 81 described above.

Next, FIG. 97 shows the initial operation and volume of the accessories of the movable effect members 17A to 17C when the power is cut off during the execution of the variation effect of the SP reach loss variation effect pattern and the power of the game machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart explaining the timing when the light amount adjustment becomes possible.

SP reach corresponding to this loss fluctuation pattern (variation time) based on the fact that the loss fluctuation pattern (variation time: 40 seconds) of the first special symbol is determined when the special game determination is the loss determination result. Variable effect of SP reach loss that executes the effect A variable effect of the SP reach loss pattern (hereinafter referred to as a variable effect of SP reach loss) is performed. The variable production of SP reach loss has a longer production time than the variable production of loss without reach.

At the timing T1, the variable display of the three effect symbols 16a is started, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted during the variable display of the effect symbols 16a, so that the player is notified that these operations can be performed. A cross key icon 60 is displayed as a notification icon.

At the timing T2, after the effect symbol 16a starts to fluctuate, the effect symbol 16a of "6 (tiger)" is temporarily stopped in the left region, and then the power is cut off. The effect elapsed time (variation display elapsed time of the special symbol) of the variation effect of the SP reach loss at the time of this timing T2 is, for example, 4 seconds.

At the timing T3, when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the activation processing of the main control board 110 and the sub control boards (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. To.
At this point, since the effect control board 120 and the image control board 150 have not been started, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 31 (solid black display), and the sound output device is displayed. No sound is output, the lamps of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the main control board 110 is completed (between timing T3 and timing T5).・ It is impossible to adjust the amount of light.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

The image control board 140 starts the standby screen display (“Please wait for a while while the screen is returning”) on the image display device 16, and then at the timing T4, the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp). The start-up of the control board 150) is completed.

The lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T4 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C (start of the accessory initial operation period). The initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed according to the above-mentioned predetermined initial operation patterns (FIGS. 70, 73, 74).
Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the effect button device 6A from the timing T4 to start the initial operation of the effect button 6a. The initial operation of the effect button 6a is performed according to the above-mentioned initial operation pattern (FIG. 75).

Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at a timing that overlaps with the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of activation of the sub-control board.

At the timing T5, the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration command output from the main control board 110.
The image control board 140 uses this reception as an opportunity to display the power recovery screen on the image display device 16 (“Please restart the game during power recovery”). That is, the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power was cut off is not displayed.

The power recovery screen shows the remaining production time (remaining fluctuation time) of the SP reach loss fluctuation effect that was executed when the power was cut off (preset effect time (40 seconds) -when the power is cut off from the start of the fluctuation. It continues to be displayed until the elapsed production time (4 seconds) = 36 seconds)) has elapsed. Volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted during the power recovery screen display period. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed.
That is, the power recovery screen display period is a period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

At the timing T6, all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (end of the accessory initial operation period). Since the power recovery screen is displayed even after the initial operation period of the accessory is completed, the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted, and the cross key icon 60 is not displayed continuously.
Here, it can be said that the initial operation period of the accessory is a period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

At the timing T7, the effect control board 130 receives the symbol determination command output from the main control board 110. This is because the image control board 140 ends the power recovery screen display on the image display device 16 and displays the game screen on the occasion of this reception.
On this game screen, an effect symbol 16a (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”) as an initial symbol indicating that the power is turned on to the game machine 1 and a background image (illustration) corresponding to the normal mode are displayed. (Omitted) is displayed.
That is, if a power failure occurs during the fluctuation effect of the SP reach loss, an initial symbol indicating that the power is turned on to the game machine 1 is displayed instead of the determination symbol of the result mode for notifying the SP reach loss after the power is restored.
While recognizing that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power was cut off has ended, it is possible to draw attention to the next fluctuation effect, avoiding the inconvenience of confusing the player after the power is restored, and the interest of the game. Can be improved.
If the power is cut off after the reach during the variable production of the SP reach loss, the production symbol 16a (the production symbol of the jackpot result mode) different from the reach symbol (for example, "7 ↓ 7") after the power is restored. "777") and the initial design ("1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)") are displayed.

When the game screen is displayed on the image display device 16, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 can adjust the volume and light amount by operating the cross key 6f, and can also perform the volume and light amount adjustment operation. A cross key icon 60 for notifying the player of the existence is displayed. As described above, even if the game screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light during the symbol confirmation display period.

At the timing T8, the variation pattern designation command is output from the main control board 110, and the variation effect pattern designation command is output from the effect control board 130 that receives the command.
Upon receiving the variation effect pattern designation command, the image control board 140 starts the variation display (next variation effect) of the effect symbol 16a (from the initial symbol) on the image display device 16.
The effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 can continue to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also continuously displayed.

In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol), the movable effect member 17A to complete the activation of the sub control board after the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is completed. When the initial operation of 17C is started and the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, the power recovery screen is displayed on the image display device 16.
The power recovery screen display period depends on the variation effect pattern (variation display pattern of the special symbol) that was executed when the power was cut off and the remaining effect time (remaining variation time) of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern. Therefore, the period during which the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted also differs depending on the power recovery screen display period.
If the initial operation of the accessory is continued even after the power recovery screen display period ends and the volume / light amount can be adjusted, the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory is the period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted. It can be said that
On the other hand, if the initial operation period of the accessory ends during the display period of the power recovery screen, it can be said that the initial operation period of the accessory is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

Even if the cross key 6f is operated during the power recovery screen display period, the volume / light amount adjustment screen is not displayed, so that the player can confirm that the power is not turned on with RAM clear, so when the power is cut off. It becomes possible to recognize that the hold information stored in is not erased and is stored in the memory.

(Change form of start timing of initial operation of movable effect member after power is turned on)
Regarding the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, in the above description, the initial operation is started when the start of the sub control boards (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is completed. However, it may be started when a power recovery command is received from the main control board 110.
FIG. 98 shows the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C and the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light when the power is cut off during the execution of the normal fluctuation effect of the loss without reach and the power of the game machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart explaining the timing of becoming.
Further, FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating the behavior of the game machine 1 when a predetermined command is normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is restored.

In FIG. 99A, this loss fluctuation pattern (variation time) is based on the fact that the loss fluctuation pattern (variation time: 8 seconds) of the first special symbol is determined when the special game determination is the determination result of loss. ) Corresponds to the normal variation effect of the reachless loss variation effect pattern in which the reach state does not occur (hereinafter, the normal variation effect of the reachless loss) is performed.
In the image display device 16, a background image (not shown) corresponding to the normal mode is displayed corresponding to the normal gaming state, and three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 16b, and the first hold icon is displayed. 2 The second hold icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 16c, the hold number “3” is displayed in the first hold number display area 16e, and the hold number “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area 16f. Is displayed.
When the variable display of the three effect symbols 16a is started, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 98. Since the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the cross key icon 60 is displayed as a notification icon for notifying the player that these operations can be performed.

In FIG. 99 (b), after the variation of the effect symbol 16a starts, the effect symbol 70a of "6 (tiger)" is temporarily stopped in the left region.
In FIG. 99 (c), the power supply is cut off while the effect symbol 16a fluctuates in the right side region and the center region. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 93. At the time of this timing T2, the effect elapsed time (variation display elapsed time of the special symbol) of the normal variation effect of the loss without reach is set to, for example, 4 seconds.

In FIG. 99 (d), when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the activation processing of the main control board 110 and the sub control boards (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is performed. Is started. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 98.
At this point, since the effect control board 120 and the image control board 150 have not been started, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display), and the sound output device 9 No sound is output from, the lamps of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are produced by operating the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the sub control board is completed (between timing T3 and timing T4).・ It is impossible to adjust the amount of light.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

In FIG. 99 (e), the image control board 140 starts the standby screen display (“Please wait for a while while the screen is returning”) on the image display device 16, and then the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board). 140, the start of the lamp control board 150) is completed. This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 98.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.

In FIG. 99 (f), the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration command output from the main control board 110. This corresponds to timing T5 in FIG. 98.
Upon this reception, the image control board 140 displays the power recovery screen (displays the power recovery image and the game restart information image of "Please restart the game during power recovery") on the image display device 16.
The power recovery screen shows the remaining production time (remaining fluctuation time) of the normal fluctuation effect of the reachless loss that was executed when the power was cut off (preset effect time (8 seconds) -until the power cut occurred. It continues to be displayed until the elapsed production time (4 seconds) = 4 seconds)) has elapsed. Volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted during the power recovery screen display period. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed.
That is, the power recovery screen display period is a period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.
In the power recovery screen display, a time gauge for notifying the display period (remaining time) may be displayed together with the power recovery image.

Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T5 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C (start of the accessory initial operation period). The initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed according to the above-mentioned predetermined initial operation patterns (FIGS. 70, 73, 74).
Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the effect button device 6A from the timing T5 to start the initial operation of the effect button 6a. The initial operation of the effect button 6a is performed according to the above-mentioned initial operation pattern (FIG. 75).
As described above, the initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C and the initial operation patterns of the effect buttons 6a are turned off when the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed in the non-game state. Is the same as the initial operation pattern of the movable effect members 17A to 17C and the initial operation pattern of the effect button 6a, which are executed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on without clearing the RAM.

In FIG. 99 (g), the effect control board 130 receives the symbol determination command output from the main control board 110. This corresponds to the timing T6 in FIG. 98.
The image control board 140 ends the power recovery screen display on the image display device 16 and displays the game screen when the symbol confirmation command is received. Even if the game screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light from the time when the symbol confirmation command is received until the end of the symbol confirmation display period. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.
On this game screen, the effect symbol 16a (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”) as the initial symbol indicating that the power of the game machine 1 is turned on is displayed in the stop display mode, and also. A background image (not shown) corresponding to the normal mode is displayed.

Even if the game screen is displayed on the image display device 16, the initial operation is continuously performed until the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed.
Here, at the time of timing T6, the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are completed up to the initial operations 1 to 3 of all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern. ..
In the initial operation period of the accessory, when the period in which the initial operations 1 and 2 are executed is the first half period and the period in which the initial operations 3 to 5 are executed is the second half period, the latter half period of the initial operation period of the accessory is the volume.・ It can be said that the light intensity can be adjusted.

In FIG. 99 (h), the variation pattern designation command is output from the main control board 110, and the variation effect pattern designation command is output from the effect control board 130 that receives the command.
Upon receiving the variation effect pattern designation command, the image control board 140 starts the variation display (next variation effect) of the effect symbol 16a (from the initial symbol) on the image display device 16. This corresponds to timing T7 in FIG. 98.
The effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 can continue to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also continuously displayed.
In FIG. 99 (i), the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped in the left region in the variation effect, and then, at the timing T8, the first to third movable effect members 17A to be related to the initial operation pattern. All the initial operations of 17C are completed (the end of the initial operation period of the accessory).

Next, in FIG. 100, when the power is cut off during the execution of the fluctuation effect of SP reach loss and the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C and the volume / light amount adjustment are performed. It is a time chart explaining the timing when it becomes possible.

SP reach effect corresponding to the loss fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) based on the determination of the loss fluctuation pattern (variation time: 40 seconds) of the first special symbol when the special game determination is the loss determination result. The variation effect of the SP reach loss variation effect pattern (hereinafter, the variation effect of the SP reach loss) is executed. The variable production of SP reach loss has a longer production time than the variable production of loss without reach.

As shown in FIG. 100, at the timing T1, the variable display of the three effect symbols 16a is started, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, so that these operations can be performed. A cross key icon 60 is displayed as a notification icon for notifying the player of the existence.

At the timing T2, after the effect symbol 16a starts to fluctuate, the effect symbol 70a of "6 (tiger)" is temporarily stopped in the left region, and then the power is cut off. The effect elapsed time (variation display elapsed time of the special symbol) of the variation effect of the SP reach loss at the time of this timing T2 is, for example, 4 seconds.

At the timing T3, when the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, the activation processing of the main control board 110 and the sub control boards (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp control board 150) is started. To.
At this point, since the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 have not been started, no information image regarding power restoration is displayed on the image display device 16 (solid black display), and the sound output device is used. No sound is output, the lamps of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27) are not lit, and the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 are operated by the cross key 6f from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of the main control board 110 is completed (between timing T3 and timing T5). It is impossible to adjust the volume and amount of light.
As described above, the period before the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

The image control board 140 starts the standby screen display (“Please wait for a while while the screen is returning”) on the image display device 16, and then at the timing T4, the sub control board (effect control board 130, image control board 140, lamp). The start-up of the control board 150) is completed.

The lamp control board 150 operates the panel drive device 17 from the timing T4 to start the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C (start of the accessory initial operation period). The initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed according to the above-mentioned predetermined initial operation patterns (FIGS. 70, 73, 74).
Further, the lamp control board 150 operates the effect button device 6A from the timing T4 to start the initial operation of the effect button 6a. The initial operation of the effect button 6a is performed according to the above-mentioned initial operation pattern (FIG. 75).

Further, the effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 continue to make it impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even after the activation of the sub control board is completed. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed as a matter of course.
That is, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light at a timing that overlaps with the timing at which the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the completion of activation of the sub-control board.

At the timing T5, the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration command output from the main control board 110.
The image control board 140 uses this reception as an opportunity to display the power recovery screen on the image display device 16 (“Please restart the game during power recovery”).

The power recovery screen shows the remaining production time (remaining fluctuation time) of the SP reach loss fluctuation effect that was executed when the power was cut off (preset effect time (40 seconds) -the elapsed time until the power supply was cut off. It continues to be displayed until (4 seconds) = 36 seconds)) elapses. Volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted during the power recovery screen display period. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is not displayed.
That is, the power recovery screen display period is a period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

At the timing T6, all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (the initial operation period of the accessory is completed). Since the power recovery screen is continuously displayed even after the initial operation period of the accessory is completed, the volume and light amount cannot be adjusted, and the cross key icon 60 is not continuously displayed.
In other words, it can be said that the initial operation period of the accessory is a period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

At the timing T7, the effect control board 130 receives the symbol determination command output from the main control board 110.
The image control board 140 ends the power recovery screen display on the image display device 16 and displays the game screen when the symbol confirmation command is received. Even if the game screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust the volume and the amount of light from the time when the symbol confirmation command is received until the end of the symbol confirmation display period. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also not displayed.
On this game screen, the effect symbol 16a (“1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)”) as the initial symbol indicating that the power of the game machine 1 is turned on is displayed in the stop display mode, and also. A background image (not shown) corresponding to the normal mode is displayed.
If the power is cut off after the reach during the variable production of the SP reach loss, the effect symbol 16a (determination symbol (“767”) of the result mode of the reach loss and the initial symbol (“”) are different from the reach symbol after the power is restored. 1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) ") is displayed.
If the power is cut off after the reach during the jackpot fluctuation effect, the effect symbol 16a (determination symbol (“777”) of the jackpot result mode, which is different from the reach symbol after the power is restored, and the initial symbol (“” 1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) "))) is displayed, or the jackpot effect is performed without displaying the effect symbol 16a different from the reach symbol.

At the timing T8 of FIG. 100, the variable effect pattern designation command is output from the main control board 110, and the variable effect pattern designation command is output from the effect control board 130 that receives the command.
Upon receiving the variation effect pattern designation command, the image control board 140 starts the variation display (next variation effect) of the effect symbol 16a (from the initial symbol) on the image display device 16.
The effect control board 130 and the image control board 140 can continue to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 6f. Therefore, the cross key icon 60 is also continuously displayed.

In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of the fluctuation effect (variation display of the special symbol), the movable effect member is completed when the main control board 110 is started after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on without clearing the RAM. The initial operation of 17A to 17C is started, and the power recovery screen is displayed on the image display device 16.
The power recovery screen display period is the remaining effect time (remaining variation) of the variation effect pattern (variation pattern of the special symbol) that is executed and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) that was executed when the power was cut off. Since it differs depending on the time), the period during which the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted also differs depending on the power recovery screen display period.
If the initial operation of the accessory is continued even after the power recovery screen display period ends and the volume / light amount can be adjusted, the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory is the period during which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted. It can be said that
On the other hand, if the initial operation period of the accessory ends during the display period of the power recovery screen, it can be said that the initial operation period of the accessory is a period in which the volume / light amount cannot be adjusted.

In addition, in FIG. 95, FIG. 97, FIG. 98, and FIG. 100 described above, when the power restoration command is not normally output from the main control board 110 to the sub control board (effect control board 130) after the power is turned on, or the fluctuation pattern is specified. When the command was not output normally, or when the sub control board (effect control board 130) could not normally receive the power recovery command from the main control board 110, or when the fluctuation pattern specification command could not be received normally. The same is true for (2) in FIG. 77 and (3) in FIG. 81 described above.

Here, conventionally, when the power is cut off in the non-game state (customer waiting state) or the game state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the jackpot game are not executed, the power of the game machine 1 is turned on and restored. Processing is done. In this restoration process, at the start timing of the initial operation of the movable effect member, the volume / light amount adjustment process for adjusting the volume of the effect sound and the light amount of the light emission effect executed in response to the player's cross key 6f operation is performed. If they overlap, the load of the control process becomes large, which may affect the initial operation of the movable effect member and the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light.

Therefore, as a configuration for solving the above problems, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated and the effect of the game can be adjusted according to the operation of the cross key 6f by the player. Adjustment means and initial operation control means for causing the movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform the initial operation over the initial operation period of the accessory according to the power supplied to the game machine 1. The initial operation period includes a period in which the effect of the effect cannot be adjusted by the adjusting means under predetermined conditions (the initial operation period of the accessory, the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory).

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated, the adjusting means that can adjust the volume of the effect sound related to the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f by the player, and the game machine 1 An initial operation control means for causing the movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform an initial operation over the initial operation period of the accessory according to the supply of electric power is provided, and the initial operation period of the accessory is set under a predetermined condition. , Includes a period during which the volume of the effect sound cannot be adjusted by the adjusting means.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated, the adjusting means that can adjust the light amount of the light emission effect related to the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f by the player, and the game machine 1 An initial operation control means for causing the movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform an initial operation over the initial operation period of the accessory according to the supply of electric power is provided, and the initial operation period of the accessory is set under predetermined conditions. , Includes a period during which the amount of light emission effect cannot be adjusted by the adjusting means.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated, and the volume adjusting means that can adjust the volume of the effect sound related to the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f (up / down key) by the player. , The light amount adjusting means that can adjust the light amount of the light emission effect related to the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f (left and right keys) by the player, and the initial operation period of the accessory according to the power supplied to the game machine 1. It is provided with an initial operation control means for causing the movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform an initial operation, and can output a first confirmation sound (trumpet sound) with the volume adjustment of the effect sound by the volume adjusting means. It is possible to output a second confirmation sound (bell sound) different from the first confirmation sound in accordance with the light amount adjustment of the light emission effect by the light amount adjusting means, and the initial operation period of the accessory is under a predetermined condition. This includes a period during which the volume adjustment of the effect sound by the volume adjusting means and the light amount adjustment of the light emission effect by the light amount adjusting means are impossible.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated, and the volume adjusting means that can adjust the volume of the effect sound related to the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f (up / down key) by the player. , The light amount adjusting means that can adjust the light amount of the light emission effect related to the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f (left and right keys) by the player, and the initial operation period of the accessory according to the power supplied to the game machine 1. An initial operation control means for causing the movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform an initial operation is provided, and the volume adjustment of the effect sound by the volume adjusting means outputs a confirmation sound when the cross key 6f operation is performed. The light amount adjustment of the light emission effect by the light amount adjusting means is executed without the output of the confirmation sound, and the initial operation period of the accessory is the effect sound of the volume adjusting means under a predetermined condition. This includes a period during which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment of the light emission effect by the light amount adjusting means are not possible.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated, and the volume adjusting means that can adjust the volume of the effect sound related to the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f (up / down key) by the player. , The light amount adjusting means that can adjust the light amount of the light emission effect related to the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f (left and right keys) by the player, and the initial operation period of the accessory according to the power supplied to the game machine 1. An initial operation control means for causing the movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform an initial operation is provided, and the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the volume adjusting means and the light amount of the light emission effect is adjusted by the light amount adjusting means, respectively. The confirmation sound common to the above can be output, and the initial operation period of the accessory is a period during which the volume adjustment of the effect sound by the volume adjusting means and the light amount adjustment of the light emission effect by the light amount adjusting means are not possible under predetermined conditions. Including.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game when the start condition is satisfied, and a symbol display for stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the result of the determination after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Depending on the control means, the movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated, the adjustment means that can adjust the effect of the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f by the player, and the power supplied to the game machine 1. The movable effect members 17A to 17C are provided with initial operation control means for causing the movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform the initial operation over the initial operation period of the accessory, and the initial operation period of the accessory is adjusted by the adjusting means under predetermined conditions. Is a period in which the effect of the effect cannot be adjusted by the adjusting means even during the symbol confirmation display accompanying the result of the determination, and the adjustment is not possible during the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C. The period is longer than the non-adjustable period during the symbol confirmation display.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated, an adjusting means that can adjust the effect of the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f by the player, and the game machine 1 The initial operation control means for causing the plurality of movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform the initial operation over the initial operation period of the accessory according to the supply of electric power is provided, and the initial operation period of the accessory is a predetermined condition. Below, the non-adjustable period includes a period in which the effect cannot be adjusted by the adjusting means, and the non-adjustable period always overlaps with the start timing of the initial operation period of the accessory.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, a clear means for clearing the stored contents stored in the storage unit of the main control means, and a cross key by the player. When power is supplied to the game machine 1 without the clearing process by the clearing means, the game machine 1 is provided with an adjusting means capable of adjusting the effect of the game according to the 6f operation. After one hour (the initial operation period of the accessory and the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory) has elapsed, the adjustment by the adjusting means becomes possible, and power is supplied to the game machine 1 with the clearing process by the clearing means. In this case, the adjustment by the adjusting means becomes possible after the second time (RAM clear notification time) has elapsed since the power was supplied.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable effect members 17A to 17C that can be operated, the main control means that controls the progress of the game, and the storage processing of the stored contents stored in the storage unit of the main control means are cleared. A clearing means for performing the above and an adjusting means for adjusting the effect of the game according to the operation of the cross key 6f by the player are provided, and power is supplied to the game machine 1 without the clearing process by the clearing means. In this case, the adjustment by the adjusting means becomes possible after the first time (the initial operation period of the accessory and the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory) elapses after the power is supplied, and the clearing process by the clearing means When the electric power is supplied to the game machine 1 together with the above, the adjustment by the adjusting means becomes possible after the second time (RAM clear notification time) elapses after the electric power is supplied, and the clearing process by the clearing means The initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed according to the power supplied to the game machine 1, and after the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started, regardless of whether or not Adjustment by the adjustment means is possible.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means for controlling the progress of the game and the RAM clear switch 58c operated when clearing the stored contents stored in the storage unit of the main control means are performed. A power switch operated when supplying electric power to the game machine 1 and a cross key 6f operated when adjusting the effect related to the game are provided, and the game machine 1 is provided without the clearing process. When the electric power is supplied, the effect can be adjusted after the first hour (the initial operation period of the accessory and the first half of the initial operation period of the accessory) has elapsed since the power was supplied. When power is supplied to the game machine 1 with the processing, the effect can be adjusted after the second time (RAM clear notification time) has elapsed since the power was supplied, and the clear processing is performed. When the effect is adjusted after that, the operation order of the RAM clear switch 58c, the power switch, and the cross key 6f is performed.

By doing so, when the power is cut off and power is supplied to the game machine 1 without RAM clear in the non-game state where the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not executed, the non-game When the power was cut off and power was supplied to the game machine 1 with RAM clear in the state, the power was cut off and the power of the game machine 1 without RAM clear was supplied in the game state. In this case, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light under suitable conditions, and the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 9 and the amount of light (light emission) of various lighting devices (panel lighting device 18, frame lighting device 27). Since the player can appropriately adjust the intensity) using the cross key 6f to change the desired volume and amount of light, the interest of the game can be significantly enhanced.

In this embodiment, a plurality of image display devices may be provided. As the image display device, a liquid crystal display device, a rear projector, or any other display device can be adopted.
Further, the display mode of the image display device of the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko game machines but also to slot machines, other game machines having a display device, and game machines in general.

1 Game machine 6f Cross key 17 Drive device for board 17A to 17D Movable production member (effect)
58c RAM clear switch 110 main control board 110a main CPU
110c main RAM
130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU
140 Image control board 141 General CPU
150 lamp control board
150a lamp CPU

Claims (1)

In the game machine that plays the game
The main control means that controls the progress of the game,
A first operating means operated when clearing the stored contents stored in the storage unit of the main control means, and
A second operating means operated when supplying electric power to the game machine,
It is equipped with a third operating means that is operated when adjusting the effect of the game.
When the electric power is supplied to the game machine without the clearing process, the effect can be adjusted after the first time has passed since the electric power was supplied.
When electric power is supplied to the game machine with the clearing process, the effect can be adjusted after the second time has elapsed since the electric power was supplied.
When adjusting the effect after the clearing process is performed, the operation order of the first operating means, the second operating means, and the third operating means is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.